summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-10-25 23:12:18 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2010-10-25 23:12:18 +0000
commitd74b95d250c7632cb73e7420db04e2e38adc3827 (patch)
treefbc6763253fbb9d309da7b613857d782ee5feccb /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces
parentec47c1b7880fd4f626f8aa8377e576e03d72c24f (diff)
new latex package interfaces (25oct10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@20206 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.drv109
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.dtx6928
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.ins150
3 files changed, 7187 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.drv b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.drv
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..20c3635f9b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.drv
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `interfaces.drv',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% interfaces.dtx (with options: `driver')
+%%
+%% This is a generated file.
+%%
+%% interfaces : 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces : interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% This work consists of the main source file interfaces.dtx
+%% and the derived files
+%% interfaces.sty, interfaces.pdf, interfaces.ins,
+%% interfaces-base.sty,
+%% interfaces-LaTeX.sty,
+%% interfaces-tikz.sty,
+%% interfaces-titlesec.sty,
+%% interfaces-hyperref.sty,
+%% interfaces-bookmark.sty,
+%% interfaces-hypbmsec.sty,interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex,
+%% interfaces-fancyhdr.sty,
+%% interfaces-marks.sty,
+%% interfaces-tocloft.sty,
+%% interfaces-makecell.sty,
+%% interfaces-enumitem.sty,
+%% interfaces-truncate.sty,
+%% interfaces-appendix.sty,
+%% interfaces-embedfile.sty,
+%% interfaces-environ.sty,
+%% interfaces-umrand.sty,
+%% interfaces-scrlfile.sty,
+%% interfaces-pgfkeys.sty,
+%% interfaces-etoolbox.sty,
+%% interfaces-fancyvrb.sty
+%%
+%% interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+%% Copyright (C) 2010 by Florent Chervet <florent.chervet@free.fr>
+%%
+\let\CTANLinks=y
+\edef\thisfile{\jobname}
+\def\thisinfo{interfaces with keys for other packages (\FC)}
+\def\thisdate{2010/10/20}
+\def\thisversion{1.0}
+\def\CTANbaseurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/}
+\def\LocalOrCTAN#1#2{\ifx y\CTANLinks#2\else#1\fi}
+\def\LOCALDOC{file:C:/texmf/doc/latex}
+\let\loadclass\LoadClass
+\def\LoadClass#1{\loadclass[abstracton]{scrartcl}\let\scrmaketitle\maketitle\AtEndOfClass{\let\maketitle\scrmaketitle}}
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\PassOptionsToPackage{svgnames}{xcolor}
+\usepackage{etoolbox,geometry,lastpage,tocloft,titlesec,graphicx,xspace,tabularx}
+\usepackage{fancyhdr,nicefrac,xcolor,bbding,moresize,relsize,embedfile}
+\usepackage{enumitem,framed,multirow,txfonts,makecell,enumitem,atveryend,marvosym,pifont}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{calc}
+\usepackage{colortbl,arydshln,dcolumn,delarray}
+\usepackage{hypbmsec}
+\usepackage{linegoal}
+\usepackage{numprint}
+\usepackage[breakall]{truncate}
+\usepackage{appendix}
+\usepackage[hyperindex=false,pdfusetitle,colorlinks,pdfpagelabels,pdfencoding=auto]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{interfaces-base}
+\LoadInterface{LaTeX,titlesec,bookmark,marks,fancyhdr,tocloft,makecell,enumitem,appendix,truncate}
+\usepackage{fp}
+\usepackage{zref,zref-user,zref-savepos}
+\csname endofdump\endcsname
+%%\FPmessagesfalse
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage{holtxdoc}
+\usepackage{hhline}
+\CodelineNumbered
+\usepackage{fancyvrb} \fvset{gobble=1}
+\usetikz{basic,decorations.pathmorphing}
+\lastlinefit999 \widowpenalty5000 \clubpenalty10000 \doublehyphendemerits100000
+\geometry{top=1.5cm,headheight=1cm,headsep=.3cm,bottom=1.4cm,footskip=.5cm,left=2.5cm,right=1cm}
+\hypersetup{%
+ pdftitle={The interfaces package},%
+ pdfsubject={interfaces with keys for other packages},%
+ pdfauthor={F. CHERVET},%
+ pdfpagemode=UseNone,%
+ colorlinks,linkcolor=reflink,filecolor=reffilecolor,%
+ pdfstartview={FitH},%
+ hyperindex=true,%
+ pdfkeywords={tex, e-tex, latex, package, interfaces, pgfkeys,%
+ scrlfile, titlesec, fancyhdr, tocloft, environ,%
+ fancyvrb, embedfile, bookmark, hypbmsec, truncate,%
+ umrand},%
+ bookmarksopen=true,bookmarksopenlevel=1,%
+ pdfnewwindow=true}
+\usepackage{bookmark}
+\embedfile{\thisfile.dtx}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{\thisfile.dtx}
+\end{document}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `interfaces.drv'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..422ef8a57e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,6928 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% interfaces : 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+% version. The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file interfaces.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% interfaces.sty, interfaces.pdf, interfaces.ins,
+% interfaces-base.sty,
+% interfaces-LaTeX.sty,
+% interfaces-tikz.sty,
+% interfaces-titlesec.sty,
+% interfaces-hyperref.sty,
+% interfaces-bookmark.sty,
+% interfaces-hypbmsec.sty,interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex,
+% interfaces-fancyhdr.sty,
+% interfaces-marks.sty,
+% interfaces-tocloft.sty,
+% interfaces-makecell.sty,
+% interfaces-enumitem.sty,
+% interfaces-truncate.sty,
+% interfaces-appendix.sty,
+% interfaces-embedfile.sty,
+% interfaces-environ.sty,
+% interfaces-umrand.sty,
+% interfaces-scrlfile.sty,
+% interfaces-pgfkeys.sty,
+% interfaces-etoolbox.sty,
+% interfaces-fancyvrb.sty
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% (a) If interfaces.ins is present:
+% etex interfaces.ins
+% (b) Without interfaces.ins:
+% etex interfaces.dtx
+% (c) If you insist on using LaTeX
+% latex \let\install=y\input{interfaces.dtx}
+% (quote the arguments according to the demands of your shell)
+%
+% Documentation:
+% (pdf)latex interfaces.dtx
+% Copyright (C) 2010 by Florent Chervet <florent.chervet@free.fr>
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase 0\ifx\install y1\fi\expandafter
+ \ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi
+ \ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi\relax
+\else\csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip.tex
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{* Installation}
+\Msg{* Package: 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\let\MetaPrefix\relax
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+interfaces : 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces : interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+This work consists of the main source file interfaces.dtx
+and the derived files
+ interfaces.sty, interfaces.pdf, interfaces.ins,
+ interfaces-base.sty,
+ interfaces-LaTeX.sty,
+ interfaces-tikz.sty,
+ interfaces-titlesec.sty,
+ interfaces-hyperref.sty,
+ interfaces-bookmark.sty,
+ interfaces-hypbmsec.sty,interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex,
+ interfaces-fancyhdr.sty,
+ interfaces-marks.sty,
+ interfaces-tocloft.sty,
+ interfaces-makecell.sty,
+ interfaces-enumitem.sty,
+ interfaces-truncate.sty,
+ interfaces-appendix.sty,
+ interfaces-embedfile.sty,
+ interfaces-environ.sty,
+ interfaces-umrand.sty,
+ interfaces-scrlfile.sty,
+ interfaces-pgfkeys.sty,
+ interfaces-etoolbox.sty,
+ interfaces-fancyvrb.sty
+
+interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+Copyright (C) 2010 by Florent Chervet <florent.chervet@free.fr>
+
+\endpreamble
+\let\MetaPrefix\DoubleperCent
+
+\generate{%
+ \file{interfaces.ins}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{install}}%
+ \file{interfaces.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{package}}%
+ \file{interfaces-base.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{base}}%
+ \file{interfaces-pgfkeys.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{pgfkeys}}%
+ \file{interfaces-etoolbox.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{etoolbox}}%
+ \file{interfaces-scrlfile.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{scrlfile}}%
+ \file{interfaces-LaTeX.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{LaTeX}}%
+ \file{interfaces-titlesec.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{titlesec}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hyperref.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hyperref}}%
+ \file{interfaces-bookmark.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{bookmark}}%
+ \file{interfaces-fancyhdr.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{fancyhdr}}%
+ \file{interfaces-marks.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{marks}}%
+ \file{interfaces-tocloft.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{tocloft}}%
+ \file{interfaces-makecell.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{makecell}}%
+ \file{interfaces-enumitem.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{enumitem}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hypbmsec.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hypbmsec}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hypbmsec.code.tex}}%
+ \file{interfaces-truncate.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{truncate}}%
+ \file{interfaces-tikz.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{tikz}}%
+ \file{interfaces-umrand.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{umrand}}%
+ \file{interfaces-environ.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{environ}}%
+ \file{interfaces-appendix.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{appendix}}%
+ \file{interfaces-embedfile.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{embedfile}}%
+ \file{interfaces-fancyvrb.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{fancyvrb}}%
+}
+
+\askforoverwritetrue
+\generate{%
+ \file{interfaces.drv}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{driver}}%
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* interfaces.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file `interfaces.dtx'}
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+%<*driver>
+\let\CTANLinks=y
+\edef\thisfile{\jobname}
+\def\thisinfo{interfaces with keys for other packages (\FC)}
+\def\thisdate{2010/10/20}
+\def\thisversion{1.0}
+\def\CTANbaseurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/}
+\def\LocalOrCTAN#1#2{\ifx y\CTANLinks#2\else#1\fi}
+\def\LOCALDOC{file:C:/texmf/doc/latex}
+\let\loadclass\LoadClass
+\def\LoadClass#1{\loadclass[abstracton]{scrartcl}\let\scrmaketitle\maketitle\AtEndOfClass{\let\maketitle\scrmaketitle}}
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside]{ltxdoc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\PassOptionsToPackage{svgnames}{xcolor}
+\usepackage{etoolbox,geometry,lastpage,tocloft,titlesec,graphicx,xspace,tabularx}
+\usepackage{fancyhdr,nicefrac,xcolor,bbding,moresize,relsize,embedfile}
+\usepackage{enumitem,framed,multirow,txfonts,makecell,enumitem,atveryend,marvosym,pifont}
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{calc}
+\usepackage{colortbl,arydshln,dcolumn,delarray}
+\usepackage{hypbmsec}
+\usepackage{linegoal}
+\usepackage{numprint}
+\usepackage[breakall]{truncate}
+\usepackage{appendix}
+\usepackage[hyperindex=false,pdfusetitle,colorlinks,pdfpagelabels,pdfencoding=auto]{hyperref}
+\usepackage{interfaces-base}
+\LoadInterface{LaTeX,titlesec,bookmark,marks,fancyhdr,tocloft,makecell,enumitem,appendix,truncate}
+\usepackage{fp}
+\usepackage{zref,zref-user,zref-savepos}
+\csname endofdump\endcsname
+%%\FPmessagesfalse
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage{holtxdoc}
+\usepackage{hhline}
+\CodelineNumbered
+\usepackage{fancyvrb} \fvset{gobble=1}
+\usetikz{basic,decorations.pathmorphing}
+\lastlinefit999 \widowpenalty5000 \clubpenalty10000 \doublehyphendemerits100000
+\geometry{top=1.5cm,headheight=1cm,headsep=.3cm,bottom=1.4cm,footskip=.5cm,left=2.5cm,right=1cm}
+\hypersetup{%
+ pdftitle={The interfaces package},%
+ pdfsubject={interfaces with keys for other packages},%
+ pdfauthor={F. CHERVET},%
+ pdfpagemode=UseNone,%
+ colorlinks,linkcolor=reflink,filecolor=reffilecolor,%
+ pdfstartview={FitH},%
+ hyperindex=true,%
+ pdfkeywords={tex, e-tex, latex, package, interfaces, pgfkeys,%
+ scrlfile, titlesec, fancyhdr, tocloft, environ,%
+ fancyvrb, embedfile, bookmark, hypbmsec, truncate,%
+ umrand},%
+ bookmarksopen=true,bookmarksopenlevel=1,%
+ pdfnewwindow=true}
+\usepackage{bookmark}
+\embedfile{\thisfile.dtx}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{\thisfile.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{5834}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\begin,\CodelineIndex,\CodelineNumbered,\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\~,\@ifpackagelater,\z@,\@ne}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DocInput,\documentclass,\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\GetFileInfo}
+% \DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\OnlyDescription,\RecordChanges,\usepackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage,\ProvidesFile,\RequirePackage}
+% \DoNotIndex{\filename,\fileversion,\filedate,\let}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@listctr,\@nameuse,\csname,\else,\endcsname,\expandafter}
+% \DoNotIndex{\gdef,\global,\if,\item,\newcommand,\nobibliography}
+% \DoNotIndex{\par,\providecommand,\relax,\renewcommand,\renewenvironment}
+% \DoNotIndex{\stepcounter,\usecounter,\nocite,\fi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@fileswfalse,\@gobble,\@ifstar,\@unexpandable@protect}
+% \DoNotIndex{\AtBeginDocument,\AtEndDocument,\begingroup,\endgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\frenchspacing,\MessageBreak,\newif,\PackageWarningNoLine}
+% \DoNotIndex{\protect,\string,\xdef,\ifx,\texttt,\@biblabel,\bibitem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\z@,\wd,\wheremsg,\vrule,\voidb@x,\verb,\bibitem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\FrameCommand,\MakeFramed,\FrameRestore,\hskip,\hfil,\hfill,\hsize,\hspace,\hss,\hbox,\hb@xt@,\endMakeFramed,\escapechar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\do,\date,\if@tempswa,\@tempdima,\@tempboxa,\@tempswatrue,\@tempswafalse,\ifdefined,\ifhmode,\ifmmode,\cr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\box,\author,\advance,\multiply,\Command,\outer,\next,\leavevmode,\kern,\title,\toks@,\trcg@where,\tt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\the,\width,\star,\space,\section,\subsection,\textasteriskcentered,\textwidth}
+% \DoNotIndex{\",\:,\@empty,\@for,\@gtempa,\@latex@error,\@namedef,\@nameuse,\@tempa,\@testopt,\@width,\\,\m@ne,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
+% \DoNotIndex{\maketitle,\parindent,\setbox,\x,\kernel@ifnextchar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\KVS@CommaComma,\KVS@CommaSpace,\KVS@EqualsSpace,\KVS@Equals,\KVS@Global,\KVS@SpaceEquals,\KVS@SpaceComma,\KVS@Comma}
+% \DoNotIndex{\DefineShortVerb,\DeleteShortVerb,\UndefineShortVerb,\MakeShortVerb,\endinput}
+% \makeatletter
+%
+%
+% \colorlet{pkgcolor}{teal}
+% \protected\def\pkgcolor{\color{pkgcolor}}
+% \def\descfont{\normalfont\bfseries}
+% \newrobustcmd*\FC{{\color{copper}\usefont{T1}{fts}xn FC}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\CTANhref[2][macros/latex/contrib/]{^^A
+% \href{\CTANbaseurl#1#2}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1#2}}^^A
+% }
+% \newrobustcmd*\thispackage{\@ifstar{\thisp@ckage{}}{\thisp@ckage\xspace}}
+% \def\thisp@ckage#1{\@testopt{\thisp@ck@ge{#1}}{\thisfile}}
+% \def\thisp@ck@ge#1[#2]{\xpackage{\pkgcolor#2}#1}
+% \def\ThisPackage{\Xpackage{\thisfile}\xspace}
+% \newrobustcmd*\Xpackage[2][macros/latex/contrib/]{\@testopt{\X@package[{#1}]{#2}}{}}
+% \def\X@package[#1]#2[#3]{^^A #1=href, #2=name, #3=description (footnote)
+% \xpackage{#2\footnote{\noindent\xpackage{#2}: \CTANhref[{#1}]{#2}#3}}^^A
+% }
+% \def\ThisPackage{\Xpackage{\thisfile}\xspace}
+% \newrobustcmd\doclink[2][]{\ifblank{#1}
+% {\hyperref{\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/#2/#2.pdf}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/#2}}{}{}{#2}}
+% {\hyperref{#1}{}{}{#2}}%
+% }
+% \newrobustcmd\ClearPage{\@ifstar{\vfill\null\clearpage}{}}
+% \renewcommand\bottomtitlespace{.2\textheight}
+% \catcode`\§ \active \def§{\@ifnextchar §{\endgraf\nobreak\vskip-2\parskip}{\endgraf\nobreak\vskip-\parskip}}
+% \def\Underbrace#1_#2{$\underbrace{\vtop to2ex{}\hbox{#1}}_{\footnotesize\hbox{#2}}$}
+% \newcolumntype{O}{>{\opt}r@{\,=\textellipsis,\hskip.3em}}
+% \newcolumntype{o}{>{\opt} r@{\,=\,}}
+% \pretocmd\oldstylenums{\fontfamily{cmr}}{}{}
+% \newrobustcmd*\thisyear{\begingroup
+% \def\thisyear##1/##2\@nil{\endgroup
+% \oldstylenums{##1\ifnum##1=\year\else\,\textendash\,\the\year\fi}%
+% }\expandafter\thisyear\thisdate\@nil
+% }
+% ^^A----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \parindent\z@\parskip.4\baselineskip\topsep\parskip\partopsep\z@
+% \g@addto@macro\macro@font{\macrocodecolor\let\AltMacroFont\macro@font}
+% \font\ttMacroFont=cmtt10 scaled 900
+% \def\MacroFont{\ttMacroFont}
+% \DefineVerbatimEnvironment{VerbLines}{Verbatim}
+% {gobble=1,frame=lines,framesep=6pt,fontfamily=txtt,fontseries=m}
+% \DefineVerbatimEnvironment{VerbLines*}{Verbatim}
+% {gobble=1,frame=lines,framesep=6pt,fontfamily=txtt,fontseries=m,commandchars=$()}
+% \DefineVerbatimEnvironment{Verb}{Verbatim}
+% {gobble=1,fontfamily=txtt,fontseries=m}
+% \DefineVerbatimEnvironment{Verb*}{Verbatim}
+% {gobble=1,fontfamily=txtt,fontseries=m,commandchars=$()}
+% \def\smex{\leavevmode\hb@xt@2em{\hfil$\longrightarrow$\hfil}}
+% \renewcommand*\ttdefault{txtt}
+% \newrobustcmd\verbfont{\ttfamily} \let\vb\verbfont ^^A\usefont{T1}\ttdefault\f@series\f@shape}
+% \def\meta@font@select{\itshape\verbfont}\let\metafont\meta@font@select
+% \newrobustcmd\vbbf{\usefont{T1}{\ttdefault}bn}
+% \renewrobustcmd\#[1]{{\usefont{T1}{pcr}{bx}{n}\char`\##1}}
+% \renewrobustcmd*\cs[2][\macrocodecolor]{\texorpdfstring{\mbox{\vb#1\expandafter\@gobble\string\\#2}}{\@backslashchar#2}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\csref[2][\macrocodecolor]{$\leadsto$\hyperref{}{declcs}{#2}{\cs[{#1}]{#2}}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\patchlabel[2][]{\zref@setcurrent{patchtype}{#1}\label{patch-#2}\zref@labelbyprops{patch-#2}{page,default,patchtype}}
+% \zref@newprop{patchtype}[]{}
+% \newcommand\backslashchar{\@backslashchar}
+% \newrobustcmd\CSbf[1]{\textbf{\CS{#1}}}
+% \newrobustcmd\csbf[2][\macrocodecolor]{\texorpdfstring{\textbf{\cs[{#1}]{#2}}}{\@backslashchar#2}}
+% \let\doc@meta\meta
+% \renewrobustcmd*\meta[2][\macrocodecolor]{\doc@meta{#1{#2}}}
+% \newrobustcmd\hyperdefanchor[2][\z@]{^^A
+% \ifdim#1>\z@
+% \edef\HyperRaiseLinkHook{^^A
+% \def\noexpand\HyperRaiseLinkHook{\expandonce\HyperRaiseLinkHook}^^A% restore current definition
+% \advance\noexpand\HyperRaiseLinkLength by\dimexpr#1\relax\relax}^^A
+% \fi
+% \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{#2}\hyper@anchorend}^^A
+% }
+% \renewrobustcmd\declcs[2][]{^^A
+% \par\addvspace\parskip^^A{.5ex plus 1ex}\noindent
+% \goodbreak
+% \noindent
+% \hspace{-\leftmargini}^^A
+% \def\*{\unskip\,\texttt{*}}^^A
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|}^^A
+% \hline
+% \expandafter\SpecialUsageIndex\csname #2\endcsname
+% \hyperdefanchor[8pt]{declcs.#2}{\cs[{#1}]{#2}}^^A
+% }^^A
+% \renewcommand\enddeclcs{%
+% \crcr \hline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \nobreak \par \nobreak
+% \noindent
+% \ignorespacesafterend
+% }
+%
+% \newenvironment{declcs*}{\csname declcs*@begin\endcsname}{}^^A \begin{declcs*} width {num cols}[format]{command name} / width and format are optional
+% \csdef{declcs*@begin}#1#{\ifblank{#1}
+% {\csdef{declcs*@tabular}{\begin{tabular}}^^A
+% \csdef{declcs*@endtabular}{\end{tabular}}}
+% {\csdef{declcs*@tabular}{\begin{tabular*}{#1}}^^A
+% \csdef{declcs*@endtabular}{\end{tabular*}}}^^A
+% \csname declcs*@@begin\endcsname
+% }^^A declcs*@begin
+% \csedef{declcs*@@begin}#1{\noexpand\@testopt
+% {\expandafter\noexpand\csname\@backslashchar declcs*\endcsname{#1}}{}}
+% \csdef{\@backslashchar declcs*}#1[#2]#3{^^A
+% \par\addvspace{0ex plus1ex}\noindent
+% \hspace{-\leftmargini}^^A
+% \csuse{declcs*@tabular}{|*{#1}l|}\hline
+% \expandafter\SpecialUsageIndex\csname#3\endcsname
+% \cs[{#2}]{#3}^^A
+% }^^A
+% \csdef{enddeclcs*}{^^A
+% \crcr\hline
+% \csuse{declcs*@endtabular}\nobreak\par\nobreak
+% \noindent\ignorespacesafterend
+% }^^A enddeclcs*
+% \newrobustcmd\keytab[2][ol]{\makecell[tl]{^^A
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{#1}
+% #2
+% \end{tabular}}}
+% \newrobustcmd\xkeytab[2][oX]{\makecell[tl]{^^A
+% \begin{tabularx}\linegoal[t]{#1}
+% #2
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \def\@makeactive#1{\catcode`#1\active}
+% {\@makeactive\*
+% \gdef\staractive{\@makeactive\*\def*{\expandafter\stform\string*}\expandafter\let\expandafter\*\expandafter=\string*
+% \def\[{{\color{black}[}}\def\]{{\color{black}]}}}
+% }%
+%
+% \newrobustcmd\textttbf[1]{\textbf{\texttt{#1}}} \let\texttbf\textttbf
+% \renewrobustcmd*\bf{\bfseries}\newcommand\nnn{\normalfont\mdseries\upshape}\newcommand\nbf{\normalfont\bfseries\upshape}
+% \newrobustcmd*\blue{\color{blue}}\newcommand*\red{\color{dr}}\newcommand*\green{\color{green}}\newcommand\rred{\color{red}}
+% \newrobustcmd\rrbf{\color{red}\bfseries}
+% \definecolor{optional}{rgb}{.67,.33,0.00} \newcommand\opt{\color{optional}}
+% \definecolor{copper}{rgb}{0.67,0.33,0.00} \newcommand\copper{\color{copper}}
+% \definecolor{dg}{rgb}{0.02,0.29,0.00} \newcommand\dg{\color{dg}}
+% \definecolor{db}{rgb}{0,0,0.502} \newcommand\db{\color{db}}
+%
+% \definecolor{dr}{rgb}{0.75,0.00,0.00} \let\dr\red
+% \definecolor{lk}{rgb}{0.2,0.2,0.2} \newrobustcmd\lk{\color{lk}}
+% \newrobustcmd\bk{\color{black}}\newcommand\md{\mdseries}
+% \newrobustcmd\ie{\emph{ie.}\,}
+% \newrobustcmd\etc{{\bk\emph{etc.}}}
+% \newrobustcmd\textt[2][]{\texttt{#1#2}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\textitbf[1]{\textbf{\itshape#1}}
+% \newcommand\cellstrut{}\let\cellstrut\bottopstrut
+% \def\M{\@ifstar{\M@i\@firstofone}{\M@i\meta}}
+% \def\M@i#1{\@ifnextchar[^^A]
+% {\M@square#1}
+% {\@ifnextchar(^^A)
+% {\M@paren#1}
+% {\M@brace#1}}^^A
+% }
+% \def\M@square#1[#2]{\M@Bracket[{#1{#2}}]}
+% \def\M@paren#1(#2){\M@Bracket({#1{#2}})}
+% \def\M@brace#1#2{\M@Bracket\{{#1{#2}}\}}
+% \def\M@Bracket#1#2#3{{\ttfamily#1#2#3}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\OR{{\rred\upshape\textttbf\textbar}}
+% \renewcommand\usepackage{\@ifstar{\use@package[\pkgcolor]}\use@package}
+% \renewcommand\LoadInterface[1]{\hbox{\cs[\lk]{LoadInterface}\M*{\xpackage{#1}}}}
+% \newrobustcmd\use@package[2][]{\hbox{\cs[\lk]{usepackage}\M*{{#1{\xpackage{#2}}}}}}
+% \pagesetup[corpus]{%
+% head/rule/width=.4pt,
+% head/font=\footnotesize\color[gray]{.35},%
+% foot/font=\scriptsize\color[gray]{.35},%
+% head/left=The \thispackage package -- \thisinfo,%
+% head/right=\thefirstmarks{section},%
+% foot/left=\thispackage\,[rev.\thisversion]\,\copyright\,\thisyear\,\lower.4ex\hbox{\pkgcolor\NibRight}\,\FC,%
+% foot/right=\oldstylenums{\arabic{page}} / \oldstylenums{\pageref{LastPage}},%
+% }
+% \pagestyle{corpus}
+% \pagesetup[plain]{%
+% pagestyle=corpus,
+% norules,
+% head=,
+% }
+%
+% \newrobustcmd*\macrocodecolor{\color{macrocode}}\definecolor{macrocode}{rgb}{0.00,0.00,0.10}
+% \newrobustcmd*\IMPLEMENTATION{%
+% \clearpage
+% \hypersetup{bookmarksopenlevel=2}
+% ^^A\geometry{top=1.5cm,headheight=1cm,headsep=.3cm,bottom=1.4cm,footskip=.5cm,left=2.5cm,right=1cm}
+% \newgeometry{top=1.5cm,headheight=1cm,headsep=.3cm,bottom=1.4cm,footskip=.5cm,left=4cm,right=.5cm}
+% \pagesetup*{%
+% pagestyle=corpus,
+% head/left=The \thispackage package (implementation) -- \thisinfo,
+% head/right/font+=\smaller,
+% head/right=\thefirstmarks{subsection},
+% }%
+% \bookmarksetup{depth=4}
+% \sectionformat\section{mark=,bookmark={bold*,italic*}}
+% \sectionformat\subsection{mark=\marksthe{subsection}{\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}\,{\pkgcolor\lower.2ex\hbox{\smaller\NibRight}}\,##1}}
+% \sectionformat\subsubsection{mark=\marksthe{subsubsection}{##1}}
+% \section{Implementation} \label{sec:implementation}}
+% \let\plainllap\llap
+% \newrobustcmd\macro@llap[1]{\let\llap\plainllap\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\ifdim\wd\z@>3cm\hbox to\z@{\hss\hbox to3cm{#1\hss}}\else\hbox to\z@{\hss#1}\fi\setbox\z@\box\voidb@x}
+% \pretocmd\macro{\let\llap\macro@llap}{}{}
+% \apptocmd\endmacro{\goodbreak}{}{}
+%
+% \newcommand\reflinkcolor{\color{reflink}}\definecolor{reflink}{rgb}{0.49,0.00,0.00}
+% \definecolor{reffilecolor}{rgb}{0,.3,0}
+% \newrobustcmd*\stform{\@ifnextchar*{\@stform[]\textasteriskcentered\@gobble}\@stform}
+% \newrobustcmd*\@stform[2][\string]{\textttbf{\rred#1#2}\ifnum\catcode`\ =\active\relax\else\expandafter\xspace\fi}^^A not \xspace in verbatim
+% \newrobustcmd*\HR[1][-.2ex]{\leavevmode\raise\dimexpr#1\relax\hbox{\pkgcolor\small\HandRight}}
+% \newrobustcmd*\sectitle[2][]{Interface \HR\,\doclink[{#1}]{#2}}
+% \def\Section[#1](#2)[#3]#4{%
+% \expandafter\providecommand\csname itf@section@#1\endcsname{({#2})[{#3}]{#4}}%
+% \section({#2})[{#3}]{#4}%
+% }
+% \newrobustcmd*\Subsection[1][]{\ifcsundef{itf@section@#1}
+% {\errmessage{cle de section #1 non definie!}}
+% {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\subsection\csname itf@section@#1\endcsname}%
+% }
+%
+% \sectionformat\section{%
+% font=\Large\bfseries,
+% label=\llap{\arabic{section}},
+% labelsep=.5em,
+% top=12pt minus3pt,
+% bottom=4pt plus2pt minus2pt,
+% mark=\marksthe{section}{\thesection\,{\pkgcolor\lower.2ex\hbox{\smaller\NibRight}\,#1}},
+% }
+% \sectionformat\subsection{%
+% bottom-=4pt,
+% top = 4pt plus1pt minus2pt,
+% label={\arabic{section}{\pkgcolor$\cdot$}\arabic{subsection}\,{\pkgcolor\smaller\Ankh}\,},
+% labelsep=0pt,
+% break=\allowbreak,
+% mark=\marksthe{subsection}{#1},
+% }
+% \newrobustcmd*\handler{\@ifstar{\@handler[]}\@handler}
+% \newrobustcmd*\@handler[1][\db]{\@@handler{#1}}
+% \def\@@handler#1/.#2/{{\leavevmode\ttfamily#1{/$\!\!$.#2}}}
+% \makeatother
+% ^^A----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \deffootnote{1em}{0pt}{\rlap{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}}\kern1em}
+% \title{\vspace*{-36pt}\mdseries The {\bfseries\thispackage\footnotemark}\kern.6em package}
+% \author{\tiny\xemail{florent.chervet at free.fr}}
+% \date{\thisdate~--~version \thisversion}
+% \subtitle{\thisinfo}
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \makeatletter\begingroup\let\@thefnmark\@empty\let\@makefntext\@firstofone
+% \footnotetext{\noindent
+% This documentation is produced with the +DocStrip+ utility.
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \qquad\=\smex\=To get the documentation, \= run (thrice):\quad\= \texttt{pdflatex \thisfile.dtx} \\
+% \qquad\>\>To get the index, \> run:\>\texttt{makeindex -s gind.ist \thisfile.idx} \\
+% \>\smex\>To get the package, \> run:\> \texttt{etex \thisfile.dtx}
+% \end{tabbing}§
+% The \xext{dtx} file is embedded into this pdf file thank to \xpackage{embedfile} by H. Oberdiek.}
+% \endgroup\makeatother
+%
+% \deffootnote{1em}{0pt}{\rlap{\thefootnotemark.}\kern1em}
+% \vspace*{-26pt}
+% \begin{abstract}\parindent0pt\parskip\medskipamount\leftskip0cm\rightskip\leftskip\lastlinefit0\noindent
+% \thispackage provides a small number of user friendly macros to access features implemented in frequently used packages.
+% Most of the macros are base on \xpackage{pgfkeys}, hence the ``\textt{key=value}'' syntax.
+%
+% \thispackage is mainly based on \xpackage{pgfkeys}\footnote{\noindent\xpackage{pgfkeys}:
+% \href{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/pgf/base/generic/pgf/utilities}%
+% {\nolinkurl{CTAN:graphics/pgf/base/generic/pgf/utilities}}}
+% and \xpackage{scrlfile} for its different modules are loaded \cs{AfterPackage}. \eTeX{} is required of course...
+% Each interface is actually made as a separate module, which is loaded automatically after its \emph{master package}.
+% Adding \usepackage*{interfaces} into your document preamble will make all modules active
+% (\ie they will be loaded or not, depending on your document preamble).
+% If you prefer not to use all modules, you can load them separately as a package, for example, type:
+% \usepackage*{interfaces-titlesec} \textitbf{after} \usepackage{titlesec}.
+% A better way is to add \usepackage*{interface-base} to your preamble, and then:\, \LoadInterface{titlesec,tocloft}\,
+% indifferently before or after \usepackage{titlesec,tocloft}. Another possibility to restrict the modules
+% is to give them as options for the main package:
+% \cs[\lk]{usepackage}\M*[\xpackage{titlesec,tocloft}]\M*{{\pkgcolor interfaces}}.
+%
+% \thispackage[interfaces-base] is a mandatory ``module''. It loads \thispackage[interfaces-scrlfile],\,
+% \thispackage[interfaces-etoolbox]\footnote{All macros in \thispackage[interfaces-etoolbox] are defined
+% with \cs{providecommand} except \cs[\red]{removefromstart} which is used by \csref[\red]{repeatcell}.}\,
+% and\, \thispackage[interfaces-pgfkeys]: those are the \emph{system-layer} of \thispackage.
+%
+% \end{abstract}
+% \medskip
+% \centerline{\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(5,0);
+% \quad \textbf{Example} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(5,0);
+% }
+% {\scriptsize \def\com#1{{\dg\% #1}}
+% \begin{SaveVerbatim}[gobble=1,commandchars=$()]{FirstCol}
+% ($red(\pagesetup))[document]{%
+% rules=.5pt,
+% foot/left/odd=\arabic{page},
+% foot/right/even=\arabic{page}/\pageref{LastPage},
+% head/font=\color[gray]{.85}\bfseries\small,
+% head/left/even=\leftmark,
+% head/left=($db(\thefirstmarks)){MiniSection},$com(interfaces-marks)
+% }
+% ($red(\pagesetup))[plain]{$com(for chapters...)
+% pagestyle=document,$com(preloaded settings)
+% head=,
+% foot/left/odd = \roman{page},
+% norules, head/rule=.4pt
+% head/center=This is the title,
+% }
+% ($red(\sectionformat))\section[hang]{
+% label=\arabic{section},
+% labelsep=,
+% font=\bfseries\Large,
+% bookmark={bold,color=blue},$com(interfaces-bookmark)
+% top=6pt plus3pt minus2pt,
+% bottom=3pt plus2pt,
+% break=\goodbreak,
+% mark=\markboth{#1}{#1},%
+% }
+% ($red(\sectionformat))\subsection[hang]{
+% label=, labelsep=,
+% font=\bfseries,
+% bookmark=italic,
+% top$stform*=1.2,$com(a 120$% scaling)
+% bottom$stform+=0pt plus4pt,$com(add to previous value)
+% mark=\markright{#1},
+% }
+% ($red(\sectionformat))\MiniSection{$com(new sectionning command)
+% class=straight[\subparagraph],
+% shape=block,
+% label=,
+% top=3pt plus2pt, bottom=1pt,
+% font=\bfseries\sffamily,
+% bookmark=off,$com(or false or none)
+% break=\allowbreak,
+% mark=($db(\marksthe)){MiniSection}{#1},$com(see interfaces-marks)
+% }
+% ($red(\bottomtitles))=.2\textheight
+% \end{SaveVerbatim}
+% \begin{SaveVerbatim}[gobble=1,commandchars=$()]{SecondCol}
+% ($red(\tocsetup)){
+% depth=3, title=Contents, pagenumbers=on,
+% pagestyle=plain,$com(first page style: tocloftpagestyle)
+% title/top=1.5ex plus.5ex,
+% title/bottom=0pt,
+% section/indent=1em,
+% section/number/width=1.5em,
+% section/font$stform+=\larger\bfseries,$com(append to previous setting)
+% section/leaders,section/dotsep,
+% subsection/indent=2em,
+% subsection/number/width=2.5em,
+% subsubsection/font=\scriptsize,
+% subsection/leaders,subsection/dotsep,
+% subsubsection/pagenumbers=off,$com(no page numbers)
+% subsubsection/dotsep=,$com(no leader)
+% columns=2,$com(same as twocolumns)
+% columns/sep=.5em,
+% columns/rule=1pt,columns/rule/color=blue,
+% }
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \mainmatter \pagestyle{document}
+% \end{SaveVerbatim}
+% \begin{multicols}{2}
+% \UseVerbatim{FirstCol}
+% \UseVerbatim{SecondCol}
+% \end{multicols}
+% }
+% \clearpage
+%
+% \tocsetup{
+% title=\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height3.4pt depth-3pt\hfill\quad Contents\quad \leaders\hrule height3.4pt depth-3pt\hfill\null,
+% title/bottom=3pt,
+% before=\enlargethispage\baselineskip,
+% depth=3,
+% section/skip=3pt plus2pt minus3pt,
+% subsection/skip=-1pt,
+% subsection/font+=\smaller,
+% subsubsection/font=\scriptsize\normalcolor,
+% subsubsection/top=-3pt,
+% subsubsection/dotsep=,subsubsection/pagenumbers=off,
+% section/leaders,section/dotsep,
+% twocolumns,
+% columns/rule/color=pkgcolor,
+% after=\vskip12pt\nobreak\hrule height3.4pt depth-3pt\relax,
+% bookmark=bold,%
+% bookmark/text=Contents,%
+% }
+% ^^A\bookmark[page=\value{page},view={FitBH \hypercalcbp\textheight},bold=true]{Contents}
+% \tableofcontents
+%
+% \clearpage \bookmarksetup{startatroot,depth=3}
+% \sectionformat\section{bookmark={color=pkgcolor,bold}}
+%
+% \Section[LaTeX](Interface LaTeX)[Interface \LaTeX{}]{Interface \LaTeX{}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{changefont}\{\staractive\hskip-2cm\keytab{^^A
+% encoding\OR enc & changes \cs{fontencoding} \\
+% family\OR fam & changes \cs{fontfamily} \\
+% series\OR ser & changes \cs{fontseries} \\
+% shape\OR sha & changes \cs{fontshape} \\
+% size\OR size*\OR size\stform+\OR size\stform- & changes the font size (default unit is \textt{pt})\\
+% baselineskip\OR baselineskip*\stform+\stform-\OR skip & changes the \cs{baselineskip} for the font \\
+% linespread\OR linespread*\stform+\stform-\OR spread & changes the line spread (a real value) \kern5cm \} }
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% Example: adds 5\textt{pt} to the font size (\textt{pt} is added if not specified) and scale the \textt{linespread} by \textt{130\%}:
+%
+% \cs[\red]{changefont}\M*{ {\opt size}\stform+$=5$,spread\stform*$=1.3$} \quad (\cs{selectfont} is included in the macro).
+%
+% If a key is not specified, the current value remains.
+%
+% {\small Finally, \cs{changefont} is compatible with \xpackage{hyperref} thank to \cs{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}.}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{rowfont}\M[alignment]\M{font specification}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{rowfont} modifies the font for each cell in a row of a tabular or array.
+%
+% \cs[\red]{rowfont} specifications have priority over column specifications, exactly like \cs{rowcolor} has priority
+% over \cs{columncolor} in the \xpackage{colortbl} package.
+%
+% The implementation must be compatible with all packages that are compatible with the \xpackage{array} package,
+% which is required (\cs[\red]{rowfont} is not defined if the standard package \xpackage{array.sty} is not loaded).
+% In particular, \cs{rowfont} compatibility has been tested with success with \xpackage{colortbl}, \xpackage{hhline},
+% \xpackage{arydshln}, \xpackage{tabularx}, \xpackage{longtable}, \xpackage{delarray}, \xpackage{dcolumn}, \xpackage{ragged2e}...
+%
+% The alignment of each cell in one row can also be changed to: \topsep=0pt
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{>{\pkgcolor\ttfamily}r@{\,$=$\,}l!{\qquad\itshape\smaller or\, for \xpackage{ragged2e} settings: }>{\pkgcolor\ttfamily}r}
+% l &left &L \\
+% c &center &C \\
+% r &right &R \\
+% j &justify &J \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% Any other value for the optional \meta{alignment} parameter is silently ignored. If \xpackage{ragged2e} is not loaded,
+% \textt[\pkgcolor]L\, \textt[\pkgcolor]R\, \textt[\pkgcolor]C\, and\, \textt[\pkgcolor]J\, are synonymous with the
+% lowercase equivalent.
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \centerline{\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\scshape Example with package \xpackage{colortbl}} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+% {\footnotesize
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \begin{($dg$underline(tabular))}{|l|>{($db(\columncolor)){Salmon}\itshape\mdseries}c|lcr|} \hline
+% ($db(\rowcolor)){GreenYellow}($red(\rowfont)){\bfseries}
+% <-------- type --------> &<-- center --> &<-- left --> &<-- center --> &<-- right --> \\\hline
+% normal &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% ($db(\rowcolor)){LightSkyBlue}%($itshape$lk overwrites \columncolor)
+% ($red(\rowfont))[($pkgcolor(l))]{\itshape}
+% to left &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% ($red(\rowfont))[($pkgcolor(c))]{\sffamily\bfseries}%($itshape$lk overwrites \mdseries)
+% to center &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% ($db(\rowcolor)){MediumSpringGreen}
+% ($red(\rowfont))[($pkgcolor(r))]{\larger\upshape\bottopstrut}%($itshape$lk overwrites \itshape)
+% to right &1 &2 &3 &4 \\\hline
+% \end{($dg$underline(tabular))}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+% \medskip
+%
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|>{\columncolor{Salmon}\itshape\mdseries}c|lcr|} \hline
+% \rowcolor{GreenYellow}\rowfont\bfseries
+% <-------- type --------> &<-- center --> &<-- left --> &<-- center --> &<-- right --> \\\hline
+% normal &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% \rowcolor{LightSkyBlue}
+% \rowfont[l]{\itshape}
+% to left &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% \rowfont[c]{\sffamily\bfseries}
+% to center &1 &2 &3 &4 \\
+% \rowcolor{MediumSpringGreen}
+% \rowfont[r]{\larger\upshape\bottopstrut}
+% to right &1 &2 &3 &4 \\\hline
+% \end{tabular}\par
+% {\raggedleft\scriptsize A very bad looking example !\par}
+% \end{center}
+% \pagebreak
+%
+% Limitations for the alignment parameter:
+% \begin{itemize}^^A[topsep=0pt,parsep=0pt,itemsep=0pt]
+% \item The alignment parameter is essentially provided to format the first title line of the tabular in ``one shot'' and
+% in simple cases. Otherwise, prefer \cs{thead} (package \xpackage{makecell}) for each title cell.
+% \item be aware that changing the alignment with \cs{rowfont} in a row whose cells contains
+% tabulars or arrays will give poor results (but \cs{multicolumn}, \cs{makecell} and \csref[\red]{repeatcell}
+% have their own alignment parameter).
+% \item Changing the alignment with \cs{rowfont} in mathematical mode (\ie in arrays) does not work presently
+% \item Avoid the \xpackage{ragged2e} settings if you don't know the package \xpackage{ragged2e} very well.
+% It contains a lot of parameters for paragraph glues and indentations...
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+%
+% \bigbreak
+% \centerline{\lk
+% \quad \textsc{\scshape Example for paragraph columns (with package \xpackage{colortbl} as well)} \quad
+% }\nobreak
+% {\arrayrulewidth=.8pt
+% \def\parag#1{This is a paragraph, not too long and not excessively short, to see what happens with {\color{red}\textttbf{m columns}} {\color{Blue} initially #1}}
+% \def\tabtest{\parag {justified} & \parag {raggedright} & \parag {centering} & \parag {raggedleft}} \def\colwidth{.18\linewidth}
+% \begin{center}\scriptsize
+% \begin{tabular}{|l|>{\columncolor{Beige}}m{\colwidth}|>{\columncolor{Lavender}\raggedright\arraybackslash}m{\colwidth}|>{\columncolor{MintCream}\centering\arraybackslash}m{\colwidth}|>{\columncolor{OldLace}\raggedleft\arraybackslash}m{\colwidth}|} \hline
+% \rowfont{\larger\bfseries}
+% Initial & m column & \cs{raggedright} m column & \cs{centering} m column & \cs{raggedleft} m column \\ \hline
+% \rowcolor{Honeydew}
+% normal & \tabtest \\ \hline
+% \rowfont[L]{\itshape}
+% to left& \tabtest \\ \hline
+% \rowfont[C]{\bfseries}
+% to center& \tabtest \\ \hline
+% \rowfont[R]{\slshape}
+% to right& \tabtest \\ \hline
+% \rowfont[J]{}
+% to justify& \tabtest \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% }
+%
+% \bigbreak
+% {%
+% \centerline{\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\scshape Explanations for \LaTeX en} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }\nobreak
+% \footnotesize
+% \xpackage{array} defines the preamble of each tabular with a pseudo code like:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \hskip...\d@llarbegin \the\toks i \ignorespaces #\unskip \the\toks i+1 \relax\d@llarend... &
+% \end{Verb*}
+% where {\ttfamily\cs{toks} i} and {\ttfamily\cs{toks} i+1} contain user defined commands placed before (left side of)
+% and after (right side of) each column specification, for example: \topsep=0pt
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tikzpicture}
+% \node (L) at (1,1) {$\underbrace{\hbox{>\M*{\cs{bfseries}\cs{color}\M*{red}}}}$}
+% node [anchor=west] (r) at (L.east) {\raise.5ex\hbox{\larger r}}
+% node [anchor=west] (R) at (r.east) {$\underbrace{\hbox{<\M*{\cs{color}\M*{black}\cs ,\cs\$}}}$}
+% node [anchor=center] at (L.south) {\cs{toks}<$i$>}
+% node [anchor=center] at (R.south) {\cs{toks}<$i+1$>};
+% \end{tikzpicture}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% There are also other types of ``pseudo code'' for \texttbf p and \texttbf m columns, and for special \texttbf @
+% and \texttbf ! columns but the implementation is the same. For more details, please refer to the implementation part.
+%
+% \thispackage append to each such \cs{toks}\meta{$i$} a control sequence named \cs{itf@cellleft} and to each
+% such \cs{toks}\meta{$i+1$} a control sequence named \cs{itf@cellright}, similar to \cs{@arrayleft} and \cs{@arrayright}
+% for the whole tabular.
+% Those control sequences can be globally modified in order to change the font (with \cs{itf@cellleft}) in each cell
+% in a row. \cs{itf@cellright} is also used when modifying the alignment for the row.
+%
+% Both \cs{itf@cellleft} and \cs{itf@cellright} are equal to \cs{@empty}, unless \cs{rowfont} is used. Therefore,
+%
+% }
+%
+% This implementation is fair, and compatible with \xpackage{colortbl}, \xpackage{tabularx}, \xpackage{arydshln}, \xpackage{hhline},
+% \xpackage{longtable},\xpackage{delarray}, \xpackage{dcolumn} and certainly any package compatible with \xpackage{array}.
+%
+% {\bfseries\macrocodecolor However, you must know that \xpackage{arydshln} does not like special \textt @\, and\, \textt !\, columns.
+% If you encounter problems with \textt @\, or\, \textt !\, columns while \xpackage{arydshln} is loaded
+% (that is, the vertical lines are not correctly positionned), it's not the fault of \thispackage... }
+%
+%
+% \ClearPage*
+% \Section[TikZ](Interface TikZ)[Interface TikZ]{Interface TikZ \raise.1ex\hbox{\smaller(\HR\doclink[\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/../generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf}{\CTANbaseurl/graphics/pgf/base/doc/generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf}]{\mdseries pgfmanual})}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{usetikz}
+% \{\begin{tabular}[t]{Ol}
+% basic &loads \texttt{tikz} with libraries \textt{calc}, \textt{arrows}, \textt{scopes} and \textt{backgrounds} \\
+% all &loads \texttt{tikz} with all packages, pgf-modules and TikZ-libraries \\
+% {\normalcolor any other key} &\makecell[tl]{loads \texttt{tikz} and the specified package, module or library \\
+% using \cs{usepackage}, \cs{usepgfmodule} or \cs{usetizlibrary} \kern2cm\}}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{usetikz} is a facility provided to load \xpackage{pgf}, \xpackage{tikz}, \xpackage{pgf}-modules, and \xpackage{tikz}-libraries,
+% without the need to know if you must use\, \cs{usepackage}\, or\, \cs{usepgfmodule}\, or\, \cs{usetikzlibrary}.
+%
+% \cs[\red]{usetikz} does not parse options. If you are used to load \xpackage{pgf} with option (f.ex. \textt{version=0.96}),
+% please use the syntax:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($db(\PassOptionsToPackage)){version=0.96}{pgf}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\bfseries Memo} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+% {\footnotesize\def\theadfont{\bfseries\sffamily} \letcs\rowcolor{@gobble}\letcs\columncolor{@gobble}\arrayrulewidth=.8pt
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{>{\columncolor{AliceBlue}}X:>{\columncolor{LemonChiffon}}X:*{2}{>{\columncolor{AntiqueWhite}}X}}\firsthline
+% \rowcolor{white} \thead{TikZ/pgf package} &\thead{pgfmodules} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\thead{TikZ libraries}} \\ \hline
+% pgf &matrix &arrows &decorations.pathreplacing \\
+% pgfmath &plot &chains &decorations.shapes \\
+% pgfcalendar & &er &decorations.text \\
+% pgfplots & &scopes &decorations.markings \\
+% pgfpages & &snakes &decorations.fractals \\
+% tikz & &shapes &decorations.footprints \\
+% & &shapes.misc &positioning,trees \\
+% & &shapes.geometric &automata \\
+% & &shapes.arrows &patterns \\
+% & &shapes.multipart &fadings \\
+% & &shapes.callouts &shadows \\
+% & &shapes.symbols &through \\
+% & &shapes.gates.logic.US &backgrounds \\
+% & &shapes.gates.logic.IEC &petri \\
+% & &decorations &fit \\
+% & &decorations.pathmorphing &mindmap \\
+% & & &folding \\
+% & & &plothandlers \\
+% & & &plotmarks \\
+% & & &calc \\
+% & & &matrix \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabularx}}
+%
+% {\scriptsize\raggedleft sorry for the blank cell, but I didn't get out with \xpackage{colortbl} and the \cs{multicolumn} entry...\par}
+%
+% \sectionformat\section{bookmark={color=db,bold}}
+% \Section[titlesec]({\cs{sectionformat} (titlesec)})[{Interface titlesec: \cs[\red]{sectionformat}}]{\sectitle{titlesec}: \cs[\mdseries\red]{sectionformat}}
+%
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{sectionformat}\M*{\cs{section}} \{ \hskip-2em
+% \begin{tabular}[t]{OOOOO}
+% class &\multicolumn{4}{l}{\textt{page}\OR\textt{top}\OR\textt{straight} \M*[\cs{sup-level}]} \\
+% shape &\multicolumn{4}{l}{\makecell[tl]{%
+% \textt{hang}\OR\textt{block}\OR\textt{display}\OR\textt{runin}\OR\textt{leftmargin}\OR\textt{rightmargin}\OR \\
+% \textt{drop}\OR\textt{wrap}\OR\textt{frame}\OR\textt{runinifempty}}} \\
+% font\OR format &label &labelsep\OR sep \\
+% left &right &top &bottom \\
+% before &after &\omit & \omit \\
+% mark &break &thesection &\omit \rlap{\hfill\}} \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \newrobustcmd\key[2][\keydefault]{\textt[{#1}]{#2}} \let\keydefault\opt
+%
+% \cs[\red]{sectionformat} is a \xpackage{pgfkeys}-command for replacement of both \cs{titleformat} and \cs{titlespacing}.
+% \textbf{If a key is not given, its value remains the same} while with \cs{titleformat} or \cs{titlespacing}, you must
+% specify all values in a rigid order... Moreover, \cs[\red]{sectionformat} can be used concurrently
+% with \cs{titleformat} and \cs{titlespacing} (although \cs{sectionformat} is deemed more comfortable, this
+% allows to quickly modify some files written without \thispackage.)
+%
+% Keys corresponding to \TeX{} code (\key{font}, \key{before} or \key{after}) are associated with starred keys and \stform+ keys:
+% they append their content to the previous value. Ex: \key{font}\stform+$=$\M*{\cs{larger}} adds \cs{larger} to the previous settings.
+%
+% For dimensions or skips, the \stform+ key adds, the \stform- key substract and the \stform* key scales.
+% \clearpage
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\bfseries Example} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+% {\vspace*{-10pt}\small
+% \begin{Verb*}[frame=lines]
+% $cs[$red](sectionformat)$cs[$rred](section)[$texttbf(hang)]{% ($nnn this is the same as:) shape = hang
+% ($opt font)=\bfseries\scshape,
+% ($opt label)=\Roman{chapter}\ \textbullet\ \arabic{section},
+% ($opt bottom)=1ex plus.4ex minus.2ex,
+% ($opt top$stform+)=3pt,
+% ($opt(mark))=\markright{$#1},% ($nnn=> this defines ) \def\sectionmark#1{\markright{#1}}
+% ($opt(break))=\goodbreak %($nnn=> this defines ) \def\sectionbreak{\goodbreak}
+% ($opt(thesection))=\Roman{chapter}.\arabic{section} } %($nnn redefines ) \def\thesection{...}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+% {\small
+% \xpackage{titlesec} provides \emph{extended settings} for numberless (\ie starred) sections with the syntax:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \titleformat{name=\section,numberless}{...}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% One swallow does not a summer make, \thispackage[interface-titlesec] does not provides this feature in a \textt{key=value} stuff
+% but just type:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($red(\sectionformat))\section$stform*{ key=value }
+% \end{Verb*}
+% to give to your\, \cs{section}\stform*\, command a special format. Keys \textt[\opt]{label} and \textt[\opt]{labelsep} are not ignored,
+% this means that\, \cs{section}\stform*\, can be defined in a way it produces a numbered section! Albeit, this would be weird
+% because the \meta{section} counter is not updated for starred sections...
+% }
+% \let\keydefault\db
+% \def\EQUIV{{\normalcolor$\mathbf\equiv$}}
+%
+% \medskip
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\bfseries Memo} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+% {\small
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{>{\ttfamily\opt}ll>{\smaller}X}\hline
+% class &name of the class &\key{page}=like standard \cs{part}\par\key{top}=like standard \cs{chapter}\par\key{straight}=like standard \cs{section} etc.\par example:\cs[\red]{sectionformat}\cs{subchapter}\M*{\ttfamily{\opt class}=straight[\cs{chapter}]} \\
+% shape &shape &\key{hang}=hanging label (like \cs{section})\par\key{block}=paragraph without formatting (for centered titles)\par\key{display}=like standard \cs{chapter}\par\key{runin}=like standard \cs{paragraph}\par\key{leftmargin}=left margin\par\key{rightmargin}=right margin\par\key{drop}=wraps the text around the title \textsmaller{(the first paragraph should be longer than the title, otherwise, they overlap)}\par\key{wrap}=like \key{drop} but the space reserved for the title is variable\par\key{frame}=like \key{display}+puts the title in frame\par\key{runinifempty}=\key{hang} but no label if the title is empty\par \\
+% font\EQUIV format &format for title &applied to the label and the title \\
+% label &title label &ex: \cs{arabic}\{section\} \\
+% sep \EQUIV labelsep &space between label and title & \\
+% left &left margin &a glue: horizontal space before \\
+% right &right margin &a glue: horizontal space after \\
+% top &vertical space before &a glue: vertical space before \\
+% bottom &vertical space after &a glue: vertical space after \\
+% mark &macro with 1 parameter &ex \cs{sectionmark}: redefines \cs{...mark}\#1{...} (the argument is the title) \\
+% break &parameterless macro &ex \cs{sectionbreak} to be executed just before the section command \\
+% thesection &\textt{toc} and \textt{ref} labels&redefines \cs{thesection} \endgraf \cs{thesection}, \cs{thesubsection} \etc. are used to print references and the label in the table of contents \\
+% before &code before title body & \\
+% after &code after title body & \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabularx}
+% }
+%
+%
+% If the \xpackage{bookmark} package is loaded, with \thispackage[interfaces-bookmark], the following keys are defined for each section:
+%
+% {\small
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{>{\ttfamily\opt}ll>{\smaller}X}\hline
+% bookmark/bold &bold bookmark text &the text of the bookmark for that sectionning command will be \textbf{bold} \\
+% bookmark/italic &italic bookmark text &the text of the bookmark for that sectionning command will be in \textit{italic} \\
+% bookmark/color &colored bookmark text &the text of the bookmark for that sectionning command will be {\opt colorized} \\
+% bookmark/off &disable the bookmark &no bookmark for that sectionning command {\small alternatively you may set \texttt{bookmark/level} to a huge value...} \\
+% bookmark/style &use a \emph{style} &the \emph{style} must be previouly declared with \cs{bookmarkdefinestyle} \\
+% bookmark/level &level of the bookmark &defines \cs{toclevel@\meta{sectionname}}, see \xpackage{bookmark} documentation \\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabularx}
+% }
+%
+% The syntax: \cs[\red]{sectionformat}\cs[\rred]{subsection}\M*{{\opt bookmark}=\M*{bold,italic,color=green,on,view=FitB}} also works.
+%
+% {\smex\small\itshape Key \textt{bookmark} is an example of a key defined with the handler \handler/.is multiple choice/\,}.
+% \pagebreak
+%
+%
+% The starred keys \textt[\opt]{bold}\stform*, \textt[\opt]{italic}\stform* and \textt[\opt]{color}\stform* are also provided.
+% For example:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \sectionformat\section{
+% after=\sectionformat\subsection{($opt(bookmark/color))$stform*=red}
+% }
+% \end{Verb*}
+% makes the bookmarks corresponding to the first subsection in each section to be \textcolor{red}{red}.
+% If you acertain that there is no bookmark between the one corresponding to the section and the one corresponding
+% to its first subsection, then this is the same as: ``\textt{after=\cs{bookmarksetup}\M*{{\opt color\stform*}=red}}''.
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% Presently, \cs[\red]{sectionformat} does not implement the \emph{extended settings} of \xpackage{titlesec}
+% for \textt{odd} and \textt{even} pages.
+%
+% However, it is always possible to use \cs{sectionformat} concurrently with \cs{titleformat} and \cs{titlespacing}.
+% A better way to use different settings for odd and even pages is the use of \cs{ifthispageodd}
+% from the \KOMAScript\ classes, or the features provided by \xpackage{changepage.sty}, which is almost the same:
+% actually \xpackage{titlesec} test oddity of the \texttbf{page} counter (\ie \TeX{} \cs{count} register nr \textt 0)
+% while oddity of \cs{pageref} should be tested... Hence the decision I came not to implement different settings for
+% \textt{odd} and \textt{even} pages in \cs{sectionformat}.
+%
+% \ClearPage
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{bottomtitles}\M{glue\OR percentage of \cs{textheight}}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% This sets the value of \cs{bottomtitlespace} (see \doclink{titlesec} documentation):
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \bottomtitles{.2} ($nnn set $cs(bottomtitlespace) to) .2\textheight
+% \bottomtitles=.2\textheight ($nnn is the same)
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% You can set a negativ value: \cs{bottomtitles}$\,=-1$ to allow bottom titles.
+%
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% \Section[hyperref](Interface hyperref)[Interface hyperref]{\sectitle[\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/hyperref/manual.pdf}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf}]{hyperref}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{raisedhyperdef}\M[raised dimen]\M{category}\M{name}\M{text}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% Package \xpackage{hyperref} provides \cs{hyperdef} and \cs{Hy@raisedlink} but no easy way to insert a ``raised link''
+% with \cs{hyperdef} (or \cs{hypertarget}).
+%
+% \cs[\red]{raisedhyperdef} can be used exactly like \cs{hyperdef}, but the \textt{pdf}-anchor will be raised of the
+% specified dimension.
+%
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% \Section[bookmark](Interface bookmark)[Interface bookmark]{\sectitle[\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/oberdiek/bookmark}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/bookmark}]{bookmark}}
+%
+% A few new keys appear with \thispackage for the command \cs{bookmarksetup}:
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{bookmarksetup}
+% \{\begin{tabular}[t]{Ol}
+% bold\stform* & will make the bookmark text bold, but only for the very next bookmark \\
+% italic\stform* & \emph{idem} for italic \\
+% color\stform* & \emph{idem} for color: the previous color will be restored after the next bookmark \\
+% disable & will disable the bookmarks (the same as \cs{bookmarksetup}\M*{depth=-2}) \\
+% disable\stform* & will disable only the very next bookmark \hfill\rlap\}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% Furthermore the following code:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($red(\sectionformat))\section{($opt(bookmark))={bold,color=blue}}
+% ($red(\bookmarksetup)){($opt(color$stform*))=red}
+% \section{A lovely red, bold bookmark here!}
+% \section{And the following bookmark is blue and bold}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% will produce a bookmark with attributes: \textt{color=red,bold=true}. In other words, the starred keys of \cs{bookmarksetup}
+% overwrite the ``default'' settings of \cs{sectionformat} for the very next bookmark.
+%
+% {\smaller\itshape Note that this code requires \xpackage{titlesec}, \xpackage{bookmark},
+% \thispackage[interfaces-titlesec] and \thispackage[interfaces-bookmark].\par}
+%
+% Three new keys are added to the \cs{bookmark} command:
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{bookmark}\{\keytab{%
+% pageref & the destination of the bookmark is the page referenced \\
+% ref & the destination of the bookmark is the anchor associated to the reference \\
+% atend & the bookmark will be inserted at the end of the document \hfill\rlap\} }
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% I admit those keys will not be used very often... but imagine you want to put a bookmark at the end,
+% which points to the table of contents, then:
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($db(\bookmark))[($opt(ref))=TableOfContents,($opt(atend))]{Back To Contents}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% Provided that the label \textt{TableOfContents} has been defined, for example with \csref{tocsetup},
+% if \xpackage{tocloft} and \thispackage[interfaces-tocloft] are loaded:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($dr(\tocsetup)){label=TableOfContents} ($db(\tableofcontents))
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% The \textt[\opt]{atend} key requires of course that the package \xpackage{bookmark} was loaded
+% with the \texttbf{[atend]} option (otherwise, \xfile{bookmark.sty} gives a warning).
+%
+%
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% \Section[hypbmsec](Interface hypbmsec)[Interface hypbmsec]{\sectitle[\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/oberdiek/hypbmsec}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/hypbmsec}]{hypbmsec}}
+%
+% The features provided by \thispackage[interfaces-hypbmsec] requires \thispackage[interfaces-titlesec],
+% and therefore the \xpackage{titlesec} package: when using \thispackage with automatic module loading,
+% (or while invoking \LoadInterface{hypbmsec}), this module is loaded only after both
+% \xpackage{titlesec.sty} and \xpackage{hypbmsec.sty}.
+%
+% Package \xpackage{hypbmsec} provides extended sectionning commands with the syntax:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \section$string(out$string)[toc]{title} ($nnn or) \section[toc]$string(out$string){title}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% Where:
+% \begin{tabular}{>{\ttfamily}rl}
+% \M*(out) &is used for the bookmark (outline) \\
+% \M*[toc] &for tha table and contents and the marks \\
+% \M*{title} &to typeset the section title in the document
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+%
+% Internally, \xpackage{hypbmsec} defines \cs{hbs@bmstring} (the string used for the bookmark entry) and
+% \cs{hbs@tocstring} (the string used for the table of contents and the marks).
+%
+% \thispackage takes advantage of this and defines:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% ($opt\lastsectiontitle) ($nnn expands to the title of the last) \section
+% ($opt\lastsectionbookmark) ($nnn expands to the text of the bookmark for the last) \section
+% ($opt\lastsectiontoc) ($nnn expands to the entry of the last) \section ($nnn in the table of contents)
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% Macros for each sectionning command are defined:§
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{XXX}
+% \cs[\opt]{lastparttitle} &\cs[\opt]{lastchaptertitle} & \\
+% \cs[\opt]{lastsectiontitle} &\cs[\opt]{lastsubsectiontitle} &\cs[\opt]{lastsubsubsectiontitle} \\
+% \cs[\opt]{lastparagraphtitle} &\cs[\opt]{lastsubparagraphtitle} & \\
+% \end{tabularx}
+% with their \textt[\opt]{\textellipsis bookmark} and \textt[\opt]{\textellipsis toc} counterparts.
+%
+% Assignation to those macros is automatic. More precisely, \cs{lastsectiontitle} is defined {\bfseries after \cs{sectionbreak}}
+% and {\bfseries before \cs{sectionmark}}. {\smaller(For chapters, this is the same if \xpackage{titlesec} formats the chapter
+% titles, \ie if \cs{sectionformat}\cs{chapter} or \cs{titleformat}\cs{chapter} has been invoked. Otherwise,
+% \cs{lastchaptertitle}, \cs{lastchapterbookmark} and \cs{lastchaptertoc} are set at \cs{stepcounter}\M*{chapter}.)}.
+%
+% Values are automatically reset to empty when a section of a superior level is created.
+%
+% This feature has been implemented essentially to make the use of a \cs{mark} command at \cs{sectionbreak} easier.
+% I leave the reader to his thoughts about the necessity of such \cs{marks} in certain situations...
+%
+% \ClearPage*
+%
+%
+% \Section[tocloft]({\cs{tocsetup} (tocloft)})[{Interface tocloft: \cs[\red]{tocsetup}}]{\sectitle{tocloft}: \mdseries\cs[\red]{tocsetup}, \cs[\red]{lofsetup} and \cs[\red]{lotsetup}}
+%
+% Setting the keys overwrites the previous value, unless the \stform+ key (append code/add for dimensions), the \stform- key (substract)
+% or the starred-key\stform* (scale dimensions) is used. \cs[\red]{tocsetup} settings apply to \cs{tableofcontents} and
+% also to \cs{shorttableofcontents} (package \xpackage{shorttoc}). \cs[\red]{tocsetup} can be invoked more than once in a document...
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{tocsetup}\{\hskip-2.2cm\staractive
+% \makecell[tl]{\small
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth[t]{oX}
+% depth &\cs{setcounter}\M\*{tocdepth} {\smaller This is a \LaTeX{} rather than \xpackage{tocloft}'s ...} \\
+% title\OR contentsname &redefines \cs{contentsname} \\
+% title/top\OR title/top\stform+\OR title/top\stform-\OR title/top\stform* &vertical space before the title (set\OR add\OR substract\OR scale) \\
+% title/bottom \OR title/bottom\stform+ \etc &vertical space after the title \\
+% title/font\OR title/font* &the title font (set\OR append code) \\
+% title/after\OR title/after* &hook to execute just after the title {\smaller(\cs{cftaftertoctitle}...)} \\
+% parskip\OR parskip\stform+ \etc \OR parsep &modifies (or add to) \cs{cftparskip} \\
+% dotsep &modifies \cs{cftdotsep} {\smaller if no dimen is specified, $mu$ is assumed, otherwise, conversion to $mu\simeq 1em/18$ is supplied. Default value is $4.5mu$ and blank value is the same as \cs{cftnodots}} \\
+% dot &modifies \cs{cftdot}, the dot used for leaders produced by \cs{cftdotfill} \\
+% pagestyle &page style for the first page (\cs{tocloftpagestyle}) \\
+% mark &the mark command: \cs{cftmarktoc}§ {\small example: \cs{chaptermark}\cs{contentsname}} \\
+% before\OR before*\OR after\OR after* &hooks to execute before or after the command \cs{tableofcontents} \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% twocolumns\OR columns\OR multicol &\textt{twocolumns=true} is the same as \textt{columns=2}\, {\footnotesize Makes a multicolumn table of contents. Package \xpackage{multicol} is required!} \\
+% columns/sep\OR columns/sep\stform+\OR columnsep \etc &sets (or add) a \meta{dimen} to \cs{columnsep} \\
+% columns/rule\OR columns/rule\stform+\OR columnseprule \etc &sets (or add) a \meta{dimen} to \cs{columnseprule} \\
+% columns/color\OR columnseprulecolor &modifies \cs{columnseprulecolor} \\
+% multicolsep\OR multicolsep\stform+ \etc &modifies (or add) a \meta{glue} to \cs{multicolsep}§{\small\cs{multicolsep} is the space added before and after \textt{multicol} environment. Its default value is \textt{0pt plus 4pt minus 3pt}.} \\
+% multicols/begin\OR twocolums/before &hooks just after \cs{begin}\texttt{\{multicols\}} ... \\
+% multicols/end\OR twocolums/after &... and before \cs{end}\texttt{\{multicols\}} \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% label &the label for reference to the table of contents \\
+% ref &the reference printed by \cs{ref} when referencing the table of contents {\footnotesize(default is \cs{contentsname}. In any case, \cs{nameref} prints \cs{contentsname}.).} \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% bookmark/text &the bookmark text for the table of contents {\footnotesize(if empty, no bookmark is set)} \\
+% bookmark/bold\OR bookmark/italic\OR bookmark/color &the bookmark style for the table of contents \\
+% bookmark/level &the bookmark level: either a number or \textt[\db]{section} or \textt[\db]{chapter}\endgraf{\footnotesize Default is chapter, or section if the class does not provide chapters.} \hfill\rlap\}
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \textt[\opt]{bookmark} key and sub-keys are available only if the package \xpackage{bookmark} is loaded with \thispackage[interfaces-bookmark].
+%
+% The following keys apply to each section levels. Section level names are :
+% \texttt{part / chap {\it or} chapter / sec {\it or} section / subsec {\it or} subsection / subsubsec {\it or} subsubsection /
+% para {\it or} paragraph / subpara {\it or} subparagraph / fig {\it or} figure / subfig {\it or} subfigure / tab {\it or} table / subtab {\it or} subtable}.§
+% \textcolor{LimeGreen}{\smaller\textbf\textparagraph} may be one of those names (see \doclink{tocloft} documentation).
+%
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{tocsetup}\{\\
+% \staractive\def\Z{\textcolor{LimeGreen}{\smaller\textbf\textparagraph}\/}%
+% \makecell[tl]{\small
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth[t]{>{\opt}r@{\,=\,}X}
+% \Z/top\OR \Z/top\stform+\OR \Z/skip\OR \Z/beforeskip &modifies (or add to) the vertical \meta{glue} before an entry \\
+% \Z/indent\OR \Z/indent\stform+\OR\Z/indent\stform-\OR\Z/indent* &modifies (or add \etc) the indentation of the entry \\
+% \Z/font\OR \Z/font* &the font of the \Z\, section title \\
+% \Z/number/width\OR number/width\stform+\OR numwidth &modifies the space allowed to typeset the title numbers \\
+% \Z/number/before\OR number/before*\OR presnum &code before the section number \textsmaller{(see pseudo code below)} \\
+% \Z/number/after\OR number/after*\OR aftersnum &code after the section number \textsmaller{(see pseudo code below)} \\
+% \Z/title/before\OR title/before*\OR aftersnumb &code before the title (\ie after the section number box) \\
+% \Z/leader\OR\Z/leaders &modifies the leader: \textsmaller{the default is \cs{cftdotfill}\texttt{\{\cs{cft\Z dotsep}\}}} \\
+% \Z/dotsep &the space (in $mu$) between dots in the leader. \textsmaller{Default is \cs{cftdotsep} and blank value is the same as \cs{cftnodots}} \\
+% \Z/pagefont\OR \Z/page/font\OR \Z/pagenumber/font &modifies the font used to typeset the page number \\
+% \Z/page/after\OR \Z/pagenumber/after\OR afterpnum &macro expanded after the page number is typeset \kern2cm\} \\
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \ClearPage*
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\bfseries Memo} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }\par\kern-12pt\vskip1sp
+% \begin{Verb*}[frame=lines]
+% ($nnn numbered entries are typeset with this pseudo code:)
+% {\cftXfont {\cftXpresnum SNUM\cftXaftersnum\hfil} \cftXaftersnumb TITLE}%
+% {\cftXleader}{\cftXpagefont PAGE}\cftXafterpnum\par
+% ($nnn and for not numbered entries:)
+% {\cftXfont TITLE}{\cftXleader}{\cftXpagefont PAGE}\cftXafterpnum\par
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{lofsetup} and \cs[\red]{lotsetup} behave the same.
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{listofsetup}\M{list-name}\M{key=value}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% This command is provided to setup the parameters of user-defined lists created with \xpackage{tocloft}'s \cs{newlistof} and
+% printed with \cs{listofX} (where\, \textt X\, is the name given to the list). The keys are the same as \csref[\red]{tocsetup},
+% but there is no sub-keys for \textt{section}, \textt{subsection} \etc.
+%
+% \Section[fancyhdr]({\cs{pagesetup} (fancyhdr)})[{Interface fancyhdr: \cs[\red]{pagesetup}}]{\sectitle{fancyhdr}: \cs[\mdseries\red]{pagesetup}}
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{pagesetup}\M[pagestyle-name]\{\\ \relax\staractive\smaller \def\etc{\omit\hfill\emph{etc.}\hfill}\def\phant{\hphantom{{=\textellipsis\,\hskip.5em}}}
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth[t]{OOO>{\scriptsize}X}
+% \omit\hfill {\opt\ttfamily norule}\phant &\omit &\omit &set \cs{headrulewidth} and \cs{footrulewidth} to 0pt \\
+% rule\OR rule/width\[*\stform+\stform-\] &\omit &\omit &set \cs{headrulewidth} and \cs{footrulewidth} to a given value \\
+% rule/color &rule/font &\omit &To change the rule font/color \\
+% headrule &footrule &\omit &redefines \cs{headrule} and \cs{footrule} (no value restores default) \\
+% head/rule/width &foot/rule/width &foot/rule/skip &dimensions \\
+% head/rule/color &foot/rule/color &\omit &for head and foot rules separately \\
+% head/rule/font &foot/rule/font &\omit &\emph{idem} \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% head &foot &\omit &header and footer (\cs{fancyhead}/\cs{fancyfoot}) \\
+% left &center &right &by position \\
+% head/left &head/center &head/right &for one side documents \\
+% foot/left &foot/center &foot/right &\emph{idem} \\
+% head/left/even &head/left/odd &\omit &for two side documents \\
+% \etc &\etc &\etc & \\
+% foot/right/even &foot/right/odd &\omit & \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% offset &\omit &\omit &changes \cs{fancyhfoffset} \\
+% head/offset &foot/offset &\omit & \\
+% left/offset &right/offset &\omit & \\
+% head/left/even/offset &head/left/odd/offset &\omit &for two side documents \\
+% \etc &\etc &\etc & \\
+% foot/right/even/offset &foot/right/odd/offset &\omit &for two side documents \\
+% pagestyle &\omit &\omit &load the settings of another page style \hfill\rlap{\}} \\
+% \end{tabularx} \\
+% \cs[\red]{pagesetup}\stform*\M[pagestyle-name]\M*{key\,=\,value}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{pagesetup} resets all headers and footers, rules etc. and modifies the current (active)
+% page style depending on the \textt{key=value} pairs. \cs[\red]{pagesetup}\M[page-style] defines (or redefines)
+% a page style, starting from default values. When a key is specified with no value, the default is used (f. ex.
+% \textt{head/rule} will be \textt{.4pt} and \textt{foot/rule} will be \textt{0pt}).
+%
+% \cs[\red]{pagesetup}\stform* does not reset current values: keys that are not specified remains the same.
+%
+% \cs[\red]{pagesetup}\stform*\M[page-style] defines or redefines \meta{page-style},; the normal form starts
+% from scratch, while the starred form \cs{pagesetup}\stform* keeps previous values if they are not overwritten,
+% and if the \meta{page-style} exists, of course.
+%
+% \verb+foot/left/odd+ is the same as \verb+odd/foot/left+ etc. but \texttt{twoside} option is not checked...
+% Even pages are ignored in \textt{oneside} documents: this is \LaTeX{}, not \xpackage{fancyhdr} nor \thispackage[interfaces-fancyhdr].
+%
+% As usual, for dimensions or glues, \stform+, \stform- and \stform* keys are provided for addition, substraction and scaling
+% \csuse{@gobble}{(\smaller they are not provided for \textt{offsets} however, for dim reasons..)}. And for code (\textt{font} keys) the
+% \stform+ and \stform* keys are provided: both append their content to the previous value.
+%
+% \Section[marks](Interface marks)[Interface marks]{Interface marks}
+%
+% \thispackage[interface-marks] provides a few macros to make easier the use of \eTeX{} \cs{marks} registers.
+% \eTeX{} defines \numprint{32768} marks registers, making the use of them far more comfortable than ``old'' \LaTeX{} \cs{markboth},
+% \cs{markright}, \cs{leftmark} and \cs{rightmark}. Who gets the correct -- I mean \emph{expected} -- result
+% with such commands ? Not me, I can say !
+%
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{marksthe}\M{named-mark}\M{content} \\
+% \cs[\red]{marksthecs}\M{named-mark}\M{cs-name}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{marksthe}\M{section}\M{content}\, will mark \meta{content} into a mark register referenced by
+% the control sequence \cs{marks@\meta{section}}. \textbf{\meta{content}\, is not expanded}\,
+% (You can expand before \cs{marksthe} if you need it).
+%
+% If the mark \cs{marks@\meta{section}} is not defined, then a new mark register is allocated
+% (with \xpackage{etex}-\cs{newmarks}).
+%
+% \cs[\red]{marksthecs}\M{subsubsection}\M{cs-name}\, will similarly mark the unexpanded content of \cs{cs-name}
+% by means of the marks register \cs{marks@\meta{subsubsection}}. \meta{cs-name} is really the
+% \textitbf{name of the control sequence}, not the control sequence itself.
+%
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{thefirstmarks}\M{named-mark} \\
+% \cs[\red]{thebotmarks}\M{named-mark} \\
+% \cs[\red]{thetopmarks}\M{named-mark}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \begin{description}[font=\mdseries]
+% \item[{\cs[\red]{thefirstmarks}\M{chapter}}] expands to \cs{firstmarks}\cs{marks@\meta{chapter}}\, (this is expandable), \ie
+% either the content of the first invocation of \cs{marksthe}\M{chapter} on the current page, if \cs{marks} was used
+% on the current page, or the last invocation of \cs{marks} if no marks occurs on the current page.
+% \item[{\cs[\red]{thebotmarks}\M{chapter}}] expands to \cs{botmarks}\cs{marks@\meta{chapter}}\, \ie the content of the last
+% invocation of \cs{marksthe}\M{chapter} (the most recent \cs{marks}).
+% \item[{\cs[\red]{thetopmarks}\M{chapter}}] expands to \cs{topmarks}\cs{marks@\meta{chapter}}\, and this is the content of
+% \cs{botmarks} at the time \TeX{} shipped out the last page.
+% \end{description}
+%
+% If there is no mark or if the mark register does not exist, expansion is null (\ie nothing is done).
+%
+% {\small
+% Those commands can be used in headers and footers, f.ex:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \sectionformat\section{
+% mark=($red(\marksthe)){section}{\arabic{section}\hskip.4em\textendash\hskip.4em#1}}
+% \pagesetup{head/right=($red(\thefirstmarks)){section}}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{getthemarks}\cs{firstmarks}\OR\cs{botmarks}\OR\cs{topmarks}\M{named-mark}\M*{\cs{control-sequence}} \\
+% \cs[\red]{getthefirstmarks}\M{named-mark}\M*{\cs{control-sequence}} \\
+% \cs[\red]{getthebotmarks}\M{named-mark}\M*{\cs{control-sequence}} \\
+% \cs[\red]{getthetopmarks}\M{named-mark}\M*{\cs{control-sequence}}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% You may wish to retrieve the values of \cs{firstmarks}, \cs{botmarks} or \cs{topmarks} into a macro. This is the
+% purpose of these commands: \cs{control-sequence} is defined as a parameterless macro whose replacement text is
+% the content of the specified marks register.
+%
+% {\small If the marks register\, \cs{marks@\meta{named-mark}}\, does not exist, the meaning of\, \cs{control-sequence}\, is
+% \textt{undefined}. }
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{ifmarksequal}\M*{\cs{firstmarks}}\M*{\cs{topmarks}}\M*{named-mark}\M{true}\M{false}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% Pretty often, we want to compare the botmarks with firstmarks or the topmarks, to adapt the header and/or footer
+% in case those marks are equal or different, \ie in case the page contains a new section title or not:
+%
+% \cs[\red]{ifmarksequal} expands conditionnally code \M{true} only if the specified marks register to compare are equal,
+% otherwise \M{false}.
+%
+%
+% {\small
+% \begin{tabular}{!{\textbullet}l@{\,=\,}l!{$\Leftrightarrow$}l}
+% \cs{firstmarks} &\cs{botmarks} &there is at most one section title on the current page; \\
+% \cs{topmarks} &\cs{botmarks} &there is no section title on the current page;\\
+% \cs{firstmarks} &\cs{topmarks} &the last section title continues on the current page.
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% Those assertions are true only if you mark the section title at \cs{sectionmark} and at \cs{sectionbreak}: this is easy when using
+% \thispackage[interfaces-hypbmsec] and \cs{lastsectiontitle}...
+%
+% If the marks register\, \cs{marks@\meta{named-mark}}\, does not exist, the \M{false} part is expanded.
+% } \enlargethispage\baselineskip
+%
+%
+% \Section[makecell]({\cs{repeatcell} (makecell)})[{Interface makecell: \cs[\red]{repeatcell}}]{\sectitle{makecell}: \cs[\red]{repeatcell}}
+%
+% ^^A\subsection{\cs{repeatcell}}
+%
+% \xpackage{makecell} provides \cs{eline}, \cs{nline}, \cs{Xrows} to fill a table with empty cells, or repeated rows.
+%
+% \thispackage extends the possibility with \cs{repeatcell}. Although it is of general use,
+% \cs{repeatcell} should be used softly in order to keep the \xext{tex} document intelligible (see the examples below).
+%
+% {\def\${\textt[\pkgcolor]\textdollar}
+% While repeating cells, \cs{repeatcell} can also make calculations with:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \cs{numexpr},
+% \item \$\cs{pgfmath}\$ (\csref{usetikz}\M*{{\opt pgfmath}} required in preamble)
+% \item \$\$\cs{FPeval}\$\$ (\usepackage{fp} required in preamble) $\Rightarrow$ use \textt{round} to display the results!
+% \end{itemize}
+% Inside formulas \cs[\pkgcolor]{row} expands to the current row, \cs[\pkgcolor]{column} to the current column number (\cs{row} and \cs{column} are 1-based
+% and relative to \cs{repeatcell}).
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{countvalues}\M{comma separated list}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs{countvalues}\M{comma separated list} expands to the number of values in the list. This is also the
+% number of steps a \LaTeX{} \cs{@for} loop would do on the list: in other words, \textbf{empty values are counted}.
+% \cs{countvalues} is provided to allow you to adjust automatically the number of columns of a tabular,
+% depending on your data, with the\, \textasteriskcentered\, operator:\,
+% \cs{begin}\M*{{\dg\underline{tabular}}}\M*{{\db\textt{\textasteriskcentered\M*{\cs[\red]{countvalues}\cs{list}}\M*{c}}}}.
+%
+% \cs{countvalue} is purely expandable in one expansion step. The \meta{comma separated list} is expanded once,
+% exactly like in \LaTeX{} \cs{@for} {\smaller(\emph{hint:} you can put \cs{@empty} before, to avoid expansion).}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{repeatcell}\M[alignment]\M{columns}\{\small $\leftarrow$ number of columns \emph{or} comma separated list of values \\ \hskip1em
+% \xkeytab{^^A\begin{tabular}
+% text &the text to be inserted (repeated) in each cell \\
+% font &the font inside the cell \\
+% rows &the number of rows (default is 1 row) \emph{or} a comma separated list of value: \M*{one,two,three,four,etc.}\quad Empty values \textitbf{are not} ignored. \\
+% cr\OR end &the end-of-row sequence (default is \cs{\backslashchar} but you may want \cs{crcr}\cs{hline} or \cs{tabularnewline}...)\endgraf {\bfseries end of row sequence \textitbf{is never} inserted after the last row.} \\
+% text/row1\OR text/row2\OR text/row3 \etc &If you want to change the text on the specified rows \\
+% text/col1\OR text/col2\OR text/col3 \etc &If you want to change the text on the specified columns \\
+% font/row1\OR font/row2\OR font/row3 \etc &If you want to change the font on the specified rows \\
+% font/col1\OR font/col2\OR font/col3 \etc &If you want to change the font on the specified columns \\
+% cr/row1\OR cr/row2 \OR cr/row3 \etc &If you want to change the end-of-line sequence on the specified rows \\
+% transpose &Do you wish to invert rows and columns ? Then \textt[\opt]{transpose}\textt{=true}\, \textlarger\Smiley. \\
+% {\pkgcolor any other key} &can be used to make calculations using \cs{numexpr} or \$\cs{pgfmathparse}\$ or \$\$\cs{FPeval}\$\$.\quad Pay attention to put your formula inside curly brackets \M*{\$formula\$} if it contains a comma\, \lower.4ex\hbox{\framebox(10,10){,}}\, or an equal\, \lower.4ex\hbox{\framebox(10,10){=}}\, sign! \cellstrut \hfill\rlap{\}} \\
+% }^^A\end{tabular}
+% \end{declcs}
+% }
+% \unskip
+% \begin{enumerate}[label=\HR]
+% \item If \M[alignment] is specified, then each cell is placed into a \cs{makecell}\M[alignment] command.
+% \item If both\, \textt[\opt]{text/row$<i>$}\, and\, \textt[\opt]{text/col$<i>$}\, are specified for the same cell, then \xpackage{makecell} \cs{diaghead}
+% is used to display the values in a diagonally divided cell.
+% \item If you want to see (in the \xext{log} file) the code introduced into the tabular (or array) by \cs[\red]{repeatcell}
+% type\, \cs{let}\cs{itf@message}=\cs{message}\, before \cs{repeatcell}.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+% \textitbf{Formulas:}
+% if you say: \textt{{\pkgcolor x}$\,=\,$\textt[\pkgcolor]\$sin(10*\cs[\pkgcolor]{column})\textt[\pkgcolor]\$} for example, then
+% the formula is evaluated in each cell with \cs{pgfmath}. The result is stored into the control sequence \cs[\pkgcolor]{x} and
+% can be used in \textt[\opt]{text} or in any other following formula. The order in which the computed keys are given determines
+% the order of evaluation... \emph{of course!}
+%
+% If you specify the number of columns (\emph{resp.} of rows) as an integer, then \cs[\red]{repeatcell} works exactly as if
+% you gave it a list of integers \M*{$1,2,3,4,...,p$}.
+%
+% If you specify the rows as a comma separated list of values, the following sequences are also admissible in \textt[\opt]{text}:\par\nobreak
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{>{\ttfamily}p{\widthof{\cs[\pkgcolor]{C}\cs[\pkgcolor]{column}}}X}
+% \cs[\pkgcolor]{R}\cs[\pkgcolor]{row} &refer to the value of the list for the current row. \cs[\pkgcolor]{r} is the same {\smaller(unless you defined a formula named \textt[\pkgcolor]{r}).} \\
+% \cs[\pkgcolor]{R}\M{n} &to the value of the list for row \M{n} \\
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% If the number of rows is specified as an integer, then \cs[\pkgcolor]R\cs[\pkgcolor]{row},\, \cs[\pkgcolor]r\, and \,\cs[\pkgcolor]{row}
+% are equal (to the current row index).
+%
+% Similarly if you specify the columns as a comma separated list of values, the following sequences are provided:\par\nobreak
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{>{\ttfamily}m{\widthof{\cs[\pkgcolor]{C}\cs[\pkgcolor]{column}}}X}
+% \cs[\pkgcolor]{C}\cs[\pkgcolor]{column} &refer to the value of the list for the current column. \cs[\pkgcolor]{c} {\smaller is the same, unless you defined a formula named \textt[\pkgcolor]{c}.} \\
+% \cs[\pkgcolor]{C}\M{m} &to the value of the list for column \M{m} \\
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% If the number of columns is specified as an integer, then \cs[\pkgcolor]C\cs[\pkgcolor]{row},\, \cs[\pkgcolor]c\, and\, \cs[\pkgcolor]{col}
+% are equal {\smaller(to the current column index)}.
+%
+% If the values in the lists are numeric, \cs[\pkgcolor]R,\, \cs[\pkgcolor]C,\, \cs[\pkgcolor]r\, and \cs[\pkgcolor]c\,
+% can be used in formulas as well, \emph{o{\smaller f c{\smaller our{\smaller se...}}}}
+%
+% \textbf{Important note:} The mechanism of \cs{halign} does not allow to insert tab alignment characters into the arguments of \cs[\red]{repeatcell}.
+% Therefore, to be able to define a \textt[\opt]{text} key containing a tabular or array, the \textt{\textbf\& alignment tab character} is activated
+% (\texttt{catcode 13}) at the beginning of \cs{repeatcell}. This activation has no effect if \cs{repeatcell} is in the replacement text of one of your macro,
+% because the category code of \texttbf\& is fixed at the time your macro was read. Thus, use the control sequence \cs[\red]{tab} instead of \texttbf\& in this case.
+% \cs[\red]{tab} is only defined during the time \cs[\red]{repeatcell} does its job.
+%
+% \medskip
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad A few examples are better than a 10 pages description !\quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Conversion to scaled points}
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \def($db(\listofunits)){ pt , cm , mm , bp , dd , pc , in , cc ,sp }
+% \begin{($dg$underline(tabular))}{|>{\bfseries}c|*{9}{|r}|} \hline
+% \thead{units}
+% & ($red(\repeatcell))[c]($db(\listofunits)){ ($opt(text)) = \c, font=\bfseries } \\ \hline
+% \thead{value in\\ scaled\\ points}
+% & ($red(\repeatcell))($db(\listofunits)){%
+% ($pkgcolor(sp)) =\number\dimexpr 1($pkgcolor(\c))\relax,
+% ($opt(text))=\numprint[sp]($pkgcolor(\sp))} \\ \hline
+% \end{($dg$underline(tabular))}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% {\footnotesize
+% \def\listofunits{pt,cm,mm,bp,dd,pc,in,cc,sp}
+% \begin{tabular}{|>{\bfseries}c|r*{9}{|r}|} \hline
+% \thead{units} & \repeatcell[c]\listofunits{ text=\c, font=\bfseries } \\ \hline
+% \thead{value in \\ scaled\\ points} & \repeatcell\listofunits{ sp=\number\dimexpr1\c\relax, text=\numprint[sp]\sp} \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% }
+%
+% \subsection{Variable length cell}
+%
+% \begin{Verb}[commandchars=Ł:;]
+% \newcommand\FAMILY[3]{%
+% \begin{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}{|*{3}{>{\centering\arraybackslash}m{.12\linewidth}}|} \hline
+% Mother & Father & Children \\ \hline
+% #1 & #2 & \makecell{:Łred:\repeatcell;;{#3}{text=:Łpkgcolor:\c;;, :Łopt:transpose;;} \\ \hline
+% \end{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}}
+% \FAMILY{Johanne}{Georg}{Priscilla,John,Tom}
+% \FAMILY{Nut}{Geb}{Isis,Osiris,Seth,Nephthys}
+% \end{Verb}
+%
+%
+% \newcommand\FAMILY[3]{^^A
+% \begin{tabular}{|*{3}{>{\centering\arraybackslash}m{.12\linewidth}}|} \hline
+% Mother & Father & Children \\ \hline
+% #1 & #2 & \makecell{\repeatcell[c]{#3}{text=\c,font=\color{green},transpose}} \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}}
+% {\footnotesize \centering
+% \FAMILY{Johanne}{Georg}{Priscilla,John,Tom}
+% \FAMILY{Nout}{Geb}{Isis,Osiris,Seth,Nephthys}\par
+% }
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Empty rows}
+%
+% {\footnotesize
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \begin{tabular}{*{6}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell 6{ text/col1=\row, rows=4, end=\\ \hline } \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{*{4}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell 6{ text/col1=\row, rows=4, end=\\ \hline , ($opt(transpose))} \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{*{6}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell 6{ text/col1=\row, rows=4, end=\\ \hline } \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular} \qquad
+% \begin{tabular}{*{4}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell 6{ text/col1=\row, rows=4, end=\\ \hline , transpose } \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% }
+%
+% \subsection{color palette}
+% \label{repeatcell:colors}
+% {\footnotesize
+% \begin{Verb*}[commandchars=Ł|+]
+% \begin{|ŁdgŁunderline|tabular++}{*{4}c}
+% |Łred|\repeatcell++ {8}{|Łopt|transpose++=true, rows=4,
+% red = {$$round(\c/8*255,0)$$},
+% greeni = \red, bluei = \red,
+% greenii = {$$round(255-\red,0)$$}, blueii = \red,
+% greeniii = \red, blueiii = {$$round(255-\red,0)$$},
+% greeniv = \greenii, blueiv = \blueiii,
+% text/row1={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeni,\bluei}(\red,\greeni,\bluei)},
+% text/row2={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greenii,\blueii}(\red,\greenii,\blueii)},
+% text/row3={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeniii,\blueiii}(\red,\greeniii,\blueiii)},
+% text/row4={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeniv,\blueiv}(\red,\greeniv,\blueiv)} }
+% \end{|ŁdgŁunderline|tabular++}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }§
+% \begin{center}\smaller
+% \begin{tabular}{*{4}{c}}
+% \repeatcell {8}{transpose=true, rows=4,
+% red = {$$round(\c/8*255,0)$$},
+% greeni = \red, bluei = \red,
+% greenii ={$$round(255-\red,0)$$}, blueii = \red,
+% greeniii = \red, blueiii = {$$round(255-\red,0)$$},
+% greeniv = \greenii, blueiv = \blueiii,
+% text/row1={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeni,\bluei}(\red,\greeni,\bluei)},
+% text/row2={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greenii,\blueii}(\red,\greenii,\blueii)},
+% text/row3={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeniii,\blueiii}(\red,\greeniii,\blueiii)},
+% text/row4={\cellcolor[RGB]{\red,\greeniv,\blueiv}(\red,\greeniv,\blueiv)},
+% }
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% {\smaller \textitbf{Note: } \xpackage{makecell} interact very badly with \xpackage{colortbl}. Therefore, with \cs{cellcolor}
+% or \cs{rowcolor}, the optional \M[alignment] parameter of \cs[\red]{repeatcell} does not give good results... \xpackage{colortbl}
+% remain a rather rough package, and deserve a finer implementation... in future.}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{\xpackage{tabularcalc}-like tables (with \xpackage{dcolumn} package) and \xpackage{pgfmath}} \enlargethispage\baselineskip
+%
+% {\footnotesize \def\${\textt[\pkgcolor]\textdollar}
+% \begin{Verb}[commandchars=Ł:;]
+% \def\listofx{ -4 , -2 , 0 , 2.25 , 7 }
+% $$\begin{:ŁdgŁunderline:array;;}{|c<{\bottopstrut}|*{5}{|D..{5.5}}|} \hline
+% :Łred\rowfont;{\large\color{blue}}
+% x &:Łred:\repeatcell;;\listofx{ text=\C\column } \\ \hline\hline
+% f(x)=2x-3 &:Łred:\repeatcell;;\listofx{ fx = Ł$2*\c-3Ł$, text=\fx } \\ \hline
+% x^2 &:Łred:\repeatcell;;\listofx{ xsquare = Ł$\C\column^2Ł$ , text = \xsquare } \\ \hline
+% h(x) = \sqrt{x^2+1} &:Łred:\repeatcell;;\listofx{ x=\C\column, hx = {Ł$sqrt(pow(\x,2)+1)Ł$}, text = \hx } \\ \hline
+% \end{:ŁdgŁunderline:array;;}$$
+% \end{Verb}
+% §
+% \def\listofx{ -4 , -2 , 0 , 2.25 , 7 }
+% $$\begin{array}{|c<{\bottopstrut}|*{5}{|D..{5.5}}|} \hline
+% \rowfont{\large\color{db}}
+% x &\repeatcell\listofx{ text=\C\column } \\ \hline\hline
+% f(x)=2x-3 &\repeatcell\listofx{ fx = $2*\c-3$, text=\fx } \\ \hline
+% x^2 &\repeatcell\listofx{ xsquare = $\C\column^2$ , text = \xsquare } \\ \hline
+% h(x) = \sqrt{x^2+1} &\repeatcell\listofx{ x=\C\column, hx = {$sqrt(pow(\x,2)+1)$}, text = \hx } \\ \hline
+% \end{array}$$
+% \centerline{\$\cs{pgfmath}\$ computations}§
+%
+% $$\begin{array}{|c<{\bottopstrut}|*{5}{|D..{5.5}}|} \hline
+% \rowfont{\large\color{db}}
+% x &\repeatcell\listofx{ text=\C\column } \\ \hline\hline
+% f(x)=2x-3 &\repeatcell\listofx{ fx = {$$round(2*\c-3,5)$$}, text=\fx } \\ \hline
+% x^2 &\repeatcell\listofx{ xsquare = {$$round(abs(\C\column)^2,5)$$} , text = \xsquare } \\ \hline
+% h(x) = \sqrt{x^2+1} &\repeatcell\listofx{ x=\C\column, hx = {$$round(root(2,abs(\x)^2+1),5)$$}, text = \hx } \\ \hline
+% \end{array}$$
+% \centerline{And the same with \$\$\cs{FPeval}\$\$\, (\xpackage{fp} package)}
+% }
+%
+% \subsection{Double entry array: the Body Mass Index}
+% {\smaller \def\${\textt[\pkgcolor]\textdollar}
+% \begin{Verb}[commandchars=Ł:;]
+% \def:Łdb:\weightlist;;{weight in kg, 30, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120}
+% \def:Łdb:\heightlist;;{height in cm, 190, 180, 170, 160, 150, 140, 130}
+% \colorlet{denutrition}{Crimson} \colorlet{skinniness}{yellow} \colorlet{normal}{LawnGreen}
+% \colorlet{obesity}{Moccasin} \colorlet{serious obesity}{DarkOrange} \colorlet{morbid obesity}{Fuchsia}
+% \newcommand*\mycolor[1]{\cellcolor{%
+% \ifdim#1pt<17pt denutrition\else \ifdim#1pt<19pt skinniness\else \ifdim#1pt<26pt normal\else
+% \ifdim#1pt<30pt obesity\else \ifdim#1pt<35pt serious obesity\else morbid obesity\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}
+%
+% \begin{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}{*{:Łdr:\countvalues;;:Łdb:\heightlist;;}{|c}|} \hline
+% :Łdr:\repeatcell;; :Łdb:\heightlist;; {%
+% rows = :Łdb:\weightlist;;,
+% :Łpkgcolor:height;; = \ifnum\column>1 :Łpkgcolor\c;\else 1\fi,
+% :Łpkgcolor:weight;; = \ifnum\row>1 :Łpkgcolor\r;\else 1\fi,
+% :Łpkgcolor:BMI;; = {Ł$Ł$round(:Łpkgcolor:\weight;;/((:Łpkgcolor:\height;;/100)^2),1)Ł$Ł$},
+% text = \mycolor{:Łpkgcolor\BMI;}:Łpkgcolor\BMI;,
+% text/row1 = :Łpkgcolor\c;, font/row1 = \color{NavyBlue}, cr/row1 = \\ \hline,
+% text/col1 = :Łpkgcolor\r;, font/col1 = \color{DarkViolet},
+% } \\ \hline
+% \end{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}\quad
+% \begin{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}{|c|}
+% :Łdr:\repeatcell;;{denutrition,skinniness,normal,obesity,serious obesity,morbid obesity}{%
+% text=\cellcolor{:Łpkgcolor\c;}{:Łpkgcolor\c;},:Łopt:transpose;;,font=\large\bfseries\bottopstrut}
+% \end{:ŁdgŁunderline:tabular;;}
+% \end{Verb}
+%
+% \def\weightlist{weight in kg, 30, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 80, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120}
+% \def\heightlist{height in cm, 190, 180, 170, 160, 150, 140, 130}
+% \colorlet{denutrition}{Crimson} \colorlet{skinniness}{yellow} \colorlet{normal}{LawnGreen}
+% \colorlet{obesity}{Moccasin} \colorlet{serious obesity}{DarkOrange} \colorlet{morbid obesity}{Fuchsia}
+% \newcommand*\mycolor[1]{\cellcolor{%
+% \ifdim#1pt<17pt denutrition\else \ifdim#1pt<19pt skinniness\else \ifdim#1pt<26pt normal\else
+% \ifdim#1pt<30pt obesity\else \ifdim#1pt<35pt serious obesity\else morbid obesity\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}}
+%
+% \iftrue ^^A set to true to compute.
+% \begin{tabular}{*{\countvalues\heightlist}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell\heightlist{%
+% rows=\weightlist,
+% height=\ifnum\column>1 \c\else 1\fi,
+% weight=\ifnum\row>1 \r\else 1\fi,
+% BMI={$$round(\weight/((\height/100)^2),1)$$},
+% text=\mycolor{\BMI}\BMI,
+% text/row1=\c, font/row1=\color{NavyBlue},
+% cr/row1=\\ \hline,
+% text/col1=\r, font/col1=\color{DarkViolet},
+% } \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}\quad
+% \begin{tabular}{|c|}
+% \repeatcell{denutrition,skinniness,normal,obesity,serious obesity,morbid obesity}{%
+% text=\cellcolor{\c}{\c},transpose,font=\large\bfseries\bottopstrut}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \medskip
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{*{\countvalues\weightlist}{|c}|} \hline
+% \repeatcell\heightlist{transpose,
+% rows=\weightlist,
+% height=\ifnum\column>1 \c\else 1\fi,
+% weight=\ifnum\row>1 \r\else 1\fi,
+% BMI={$$round(\weight/((\height/100)^2),1)$$},
+% text=\mycolor{\BMI}\BMI,
+% text/row1=\c, font/row1=\color{NavyBlue}, cr/row1=\\ \hline,
+% text/col1=\r, font/col1=\color{DarkViolet},
+% } \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}\par\nobreak
+% \centerline{The same with \textt[\opt]{transpose}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \textitbf{Note that \xpackage{fp} computation can be time consuming...} depending on the formula and the number of cells to fill in.
+% While preparing first such a table, give to the computed keys a constant value, and plug the formulas only when you are
+% satisfied with the displayed tabular...
+% }
+%
+% \ClearPage*
+%
+% \Section[enumitem](Interface enumitem)[Interface enumitem]{\sectitle{enumitem}: \cs[\red]{setlist}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{setlist}\hphantom{\stform*}\M[environment,level]\{\\
+% \hphantom{\cs{setlist}\stform*}\smaller\xkeytab[olX]{
+% ^^A\begin{tabular}
+% label &the label to be used \\
+% font &the label font \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% topsep &vertical space before the list \\
+% partopsep &vertical space \\
+% parsep &value of \cs{parskip} inside the list \\
+% itemsep &vertical space between two items \\\hdashline[1.5pt/1pt]
+% leftmargin &the list left margin \\
+% rightmargin &the list right margin \\
+% listparindent &the value of \cs{parindent} inside the list \\
+% labelwidth &the width of the label box \\
+% labelsep &horizontal space between label and following text \\
+% itemindent &the indentation of the items
+% ^^A\end{tabular}
+% } \\
+% \cs[\red]{setlist}\stform*\M[environment,level]\M*{key=value}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% Enumerated lists, description lists or itemize lists can be defined by \xpackage{enumitem}
+% with the command \cs{newlist}.
+%
+% For example: \cs{newlist}\M*{mylegal}\M*{enumerate}\M*{10}
+%
+% The list can be customized with \cs{setlist}, for example:
+% \begin{Verb}[fontfamily=cmtt]
+% \setlist[mylegal,1]{label*=\arabic*.}
+% \setlist[mylegal,2]{label*=\arabic*.}
+% \setlist[mylegal,3]{label*=\roman*)}
+% \end{Verb}
+%
+% With \thispackage[interfaces-enumitem] you may specify more than one level at a time in \cs{setlist},
+% (and even more than one environment at a time):
+% \begin{Verb}[fontfamily=cmtt]
+% \setlist[mylegal,1,2]{label*=\arabic*.}
+% \setlist[mylegal,3]{label*=\roman*)}
+% \end{Verb}
+%
+% \ClearPage
+% A list can also be \textbf{modified} with \cs[\red]{setlist}\stform*: keys that are not specified remain the same.
+% \begin{Verb*}[fontfamily=cmtt]
+% \setlist$stform*[mylegal,1,2,3]{align=left,leftmargin=*}
+% ($nnn or)
+% \setlist$stform*[mylegal]{align=left,leftmargin=*}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{interitem}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% {\def\AMS{{$\cal A$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.125em$\cal S$}}
+% Just like \AMS{} \cs{intertext} in math formul\ae, \cs[\red]{interitem} allows to put some non intented text inside
+% a list environment. Example:}
+%
+% \begin{Verb}[commandchars=Ł:;]
+% \begin{:ŁdgŁunderline:enumerate;;}[label=\roman*)\,,parsep=0pt]
+% \item First item in the enumerate envir
+% :Łred:\interitem;; or (intertext)
+% \item Second item
+% \end{:ŁdgŁunderline:enumerate;;}
+% \end{Verb}
+%
+% The example give in real world:
+% \begin{enumerate}[label=\roman*)\,,parsep=0pt]
+% \item First item in the enumerate envir
+% \interitem or: (intertext)
+% \item Second item
+% \end{enumerate}
+% And the following follows...
+%
+% \Section[truncate](Interface truncate)[Interface truncate]{\sectitle{truncate}}
+%
+% The package \xpackage{truncate} by Donal Arseneau provides the command:
+%
+% \quad\cs{truncate}\M[TruncateMarker]\M{width}\M{text}
+%
+% to trunc the given \meta{text} to the specified \meta{width}, by means of \meta{TruncateMarker} if the the truncation occurs.
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{trunctext}\M[TruncateMarker]\M{width}\M{text}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs[\red]{trunctext}\, is the same as\, \cs{truncate}\, but it leaves \M*{text} to its natural width
+% if it has not to be truncated (\ie if \meta{width}$\leq$ \textt{width of }\meta{text}). Example:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{>{\ttfamily}rll}
+% truncate: &\cs{truncate}\M{5cm}\M{Hello world!} &\fbox{\truncate{5cm}{Hello word!}} \\
+% trunctext: &\cs{trunctext}\M{5cm}\M{Hello world!} &\fbox{\trunctext{5cm}{Hello world!}}
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% This corresponds to the \M*[fit] option of the \xpackage{truncate} package.
+%
+% \begin{declcs}[\red]{htruncadjust}\M{total width}\M[$x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n$]\M{text$_1$,text$_2$,$\ldots$,text$_n$}
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% This macro will measure the width of\, \textt{text}$_1$,\textt{text}$_2$,$\ldots$,\textt{text}$_n$ and adjust them for truncation:
+%
+% {\arrayrulewidth=.7pt
+% \begin{tabular}{*{5}{|c}|} \hline
+% \rowfont[c]{\ttfamily\bfseries}\rowcolor{AliceBlue}
+% text & width & adusted width & $\gamma$ (truncated?) & Returned width\\ \hline
+% \repeatcell 5{%
+% rows=4,
+% text/col1=text$_\row$,
+% text/col2=$w_\row$,
+% text/col3=\Gape[3pt]{$\displaystyle w'_i=\hbox{min}\left(w_\row,\frac{x_\row}{\sum x_i}\times\meta{total width}\right)$},
+% text/col4=\Gape[3pt]{$\gamma_\row=\begin{array}\{{>{\scriptstyle}l>{$\smaller}l<{$}}. 1 & if $w'_\row < w_\row$ \\ 0 & otherwise\end{array}$},
+% text/col5={$\displaystyle\omega_\row = w'_\row + \gamma_\row \cdot \Phi\cdot\frac{x_\row}{\sum \gamma_i\,x_i}$},
+% } \\ \hline
+% \rowcolor{OldLace}
+% & & $\Phi=${\ttfamily\smaller freespace$=$\meta{total width}}$\displaystyle\mathsmaller{-\sum w'_i}$
+% &
+% & $\displaystyle\mathsmaller{ \sum \omega_i \leqslant \meta{total width}} $
+% \\ \hline
+% \end{tabular}}§
+% {\raggedleft\scriptsize Another example of a tabular made with \csref[\red]{repeatcell}\par}
+%
+% The widths can be accessed with\, \cs{htruncwidth}\M{i}\, and then:
+%
+% {\centering \cs{trunctext}\M[TruncateMarker]\M*{\cs{htruncwidth}\M{i}}\M{text$_i$}.\par}
+%
+% $x_i$ can be any real number provided that $\displaystyle \sum_i x_i \leqslant$\numprint{16383}$=$\cs{maxdimen} in \textt{points}.
+%
+% Measuring the widths occur inside a \cs{hbox}, thus \textt{text$_1$},$\ldots$, \textt{text$_n$} can contain
+% macros, non expandable material \etc.
+% For example:
+%
+% \cs[\red]{htruncadjust}\M*{4cm}\M*[2,1]\M*{Hello,world}\, will prepare the widths so that their sum does not exceed 4 centimeters,
+% and\, $w_1 = 2 \times w_2$.
+%
+% \cs[\red]{htruncadjust}\M*{4cm}\M*[2,1,2]\M*{The,World,Is flat}\, will prepare the widths so that their sum does not exceed 4 centimeters,
+% and\, $w_1 = w_3 = 2 \times w_2$.
+%
+% If the optional parameters $x_i$ are not given, then they are equal to the natural width of \M*{text$_1$,$\ldots$,text$_n$}.
+% In other words,\, \textt{text$_1$,$\ldots$,\textt{text$_n$}}\, are truncated to a width proportional to their natural widths.
+% (And the sum of their widths will not exceed \meta{total width}).
+%
+% This macro has been designed to cleverly truncate the text of headers, when they contain titles on both sides... Usually then,
+% there are only two pieces of text whose width have to be adjusted for truncation...
+%
+% {\footnotesize
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \htruncadjust{3cm}{first quite long,second short,third} % natural widths
+% \trunctext{\htruncwidth{1}}{first quite long}
+% \trunctext{\htruncwidth{2}}{second short}
+% \trunctext{\htruncwidth{3}}{third}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \htruncadjust{3cm}{first quite long,second short,third}
+% \def\TruncateMarker{...}
+% {\color{Fuchsia}\qquad \smex \trunctext{\htruncwidth{1}}{first quite long}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{2}}{second short}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{3}}{third}
+% \setbox0=\hbox{\trunctext{\htruncwidth{1}}{first quite long}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{2}}{second short}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{3}}{third}}
+% \qquad (\htruncwidth 1\,,\,\htruncwidth 2\,,\,\htruncwidth 3\,,\,total=\the\wd0).}
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \htruncadjust{3cm}[3,2,2]{first quite long,second short,third} % first is 3/2 of the two others
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \htruncadjust{3cm}[3,2,2]{first quite long,second short,third}
+% {\color{Fuchsia}\qquad \smex \trunctext{\htruncwidth{1}}{first quite long}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{2}}{second short}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{3}}{third}
+% \setbox0=\hbox{\trunctext{\htruncwidth{1}}{first quite long}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{2}}{second short}\trunctext{\htruncwidth{3}}{third}}
+% \qquad (\htruncwidth 1\,,\,\htruncwidth 2\,,\,\htruncwidth 3\,,\,total=\the\wd0).}
+% }
+%
+%
+% \sectionformat\section{bookmark={color=black,bold=false}}
+%
+% \Section[appendix]({\cs{appendices} (appendix)})[{Interface appendix}]{\sectitle{appendix} and the appendices environment}
+%
+% \xpackage{appendix} provides a way to write appendices inside an environment. This feature is suitable
+% for short appendices like the one included in this document. \thispackage[interfaces-appendix] gives an easier
+% control on some parameter for the appendix with standard (optional) key names.
+%
+% \begin{VerbLines*}
+% \begin{($dg$underline(appendices))}[%
+% ($opt(section)) = section $OR chapter, ($nnn alternatively, the key ) ($opt(chapter)) ($nnn is provided)
+% ($opt(title)) = the appendix title, ($nnn if left blank, title is removed: [page] option of $xpackage(appendix))
+% ($opt(intoc)) = true $OR false, ($nnn put an entry in t.o.c. ?)
+% ($opt(intoc/title)) = the entry in t.o.c.]($nnn if blank, no title in t.o.c., if no value: the appendix title)
+% ($nnn$itshape appendix content ... )
+% \end{($dg$underline(appendices))}
+% \end{VerbLines*}
+%
+%
+%
+% \Section[embedfile]({\cs{embedthisfile} (embedfile)})[{Interface embedfile: \cs[\red]{embedthisfile}}]{\sectitle[\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/oberdiek/embedfile}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/embedfile}]{embedfile}: \cs[\red\mdseries]{embedthisfile}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs}{embedthisfile}\\
+% \cs{embedthisfile}\stform*
+% \end{declcs}
+%
+% \cs{embedthisfile} will embed into the final \xext{pdf} file, the current \xext{tex} file and all \xext{tex} files that are included (with \cs{include}) in it.
+% If \cs{includeonly} is used, the only files embeded (\ie attached) to the \xext{pdf} file are the ones specified by \cs{includeonly}.
+%
+% \cs{embedthisfile}\stform* embeds only the main file.
+%
+% {\smaller
+% This macro could disapear from \thispackage[interface-embedfile] if it is added to the main package...
+% Depending on Mr~Oberdiek moods {\Large\Smiley}.}
+%
+%
+% \Section[environ](Interface environ)[Interface environ]{\sectitle{environ}}
+%
+% \xpackage{environ} defines \cs{Renewenviron} but I found out it was usefull to have \csbf{ReNewEnviron} (note the case!)
+%
+% Therefore: \verb+\let\ReNewEnviron\RenewEnviron+ is made by \thispackage (\cs{AfterPackage}\M*{\xpackage{environ}}).
+%
+% \Section[umrand](Interface umrand)[Interface umrand]{Interface umrand}
+%
+% \xpackage{umrand} defines the macro \cs{ifnotempty} which is already defined with a different meaning in \xpackage{etextools}.
+% \thispackage provides a turn around to avoid redefinition.
+%
+% For this turn around, \thispackage must be loaded before \xpackage{umrand} (because we use \cs{BeforePackage}\M*{\xpackage{umrand}}).
+% This is -- really -- the only exception!
+%
+%
+%
+% \ClearPage*
+% \bookmarksetup{bold*=true,color*=optional}
+% \Section[pgfkeys](Interface pgfkeys)[Interface pgfkeys]{Interface pgfkeys {\smaller\mdseries(\HR\hyperref{\LocalOrCTAN{\LOCALDOC/../generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf}{\CTANbaseurl/graphics/pgf/base/doc/generic/pgf/pgfmanual.pdf}}{section}{43}{pgfmanual})}}
+%
+% \xpackage{pgfkeys}'s the base of all... wonderfull and inimitable! {\Large\bfseries\Smiley}
+%
+% The following handlers allows to build fairly quickly a \textt{key=value} interface for commands in almost any case:
+%
+% \centerline{\bfseries\large\lk
+% \tikz\draw [decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% \quad \textsc{\bfseries Summary} \quad
+% \tikz\draw [cm={-1,0,0,0,(0,0)},anchor=east,decoration=snake,decorate,thick] (0,1) -- ++(3,0);
+% }
+% {
+% \def\temp{%
+% \handler/.blank/ &replace blank value by another value \\
+% \handler/.is private/ &throws an error if the key is used in an assignment \\
+% \handler/.store in cs/\, \handler/.estore in cs/ &like \handler/.store in/ but with \cs{csname}...\cs{endcsname} \\
+% \handler/.true/\, \handler/.false/, \handler/.on/\, \handler/.off/ &\handler/.is choice/ shortcut for boolean keys \\
+% \handler/.is multiple choice/ &like \handler/.is choice/ but more than on choice can be selected at a time \\
+% \handler/.is enum/ &\handler/.is choice/ shortcut for enumerated keys\endgraf also provides the \textt{/key\handler/.number/} key to get the numeric index of the selected choice. \\
+% \handler/.store as code/, \handler/.estore as code/ &store value (\emph{expanded value}) in the key. Created \stform+ and \stform* keys to append code \\
+% \handler/.store as code in cs/, \handler/.estore as code in cs/ &store value (\emph{expanded value}) in a cs-name rather than in the key. Created \stform+ and \stform* keys to append code \\
+% \handler/.store as color/, \handler/.store as color command/ &store the color (\emph{the color command}) in the key. \\
+% \handler/.store as color in cs/, \handler/.store as color command in cs/ &the same, store in the cs-name rather than in the key \\
+% \handler/.store as number/, \handler/.estore as number/ &store an integer in the key (\stform-\, \stform+\, and\, \stform* keys are provided to add, substract and multiply) \\
+% \handler/.store as number in cs/, \handler/.estore as number in cs/ &the same, but stores into a cs-name rather than in the key \\
+% \handler/.defcounter/ &the same, but stores into a \LaTeX{} counter \\
+% \handler/.store as glue/, \handler/.estore as glue/ &store a glue in the key (\stform+\, \stform-\, and\, \stform* keys are provided to add, substract or scale) \\
+% \handler/.store as glue in cs/, \handler/.estore as glue in cs/ &the same, store in a given named control sequence \\
+% \handler/.store as dimen/, \handler/.estore as dimen/ &store a dimen in the key (with \stform+\, \stform-\, and\, \stform* keys for addition, substraction and scaling) \\
+% \handler/.store as dimen in cs/, \handler/.estore as dimen in cs/ &the same, store in a given named control sequence rather than in the key itself \\ }
+%
+% \smaller
+% \def\parsetest#1&#2\\#3\END{\makecell[tl]{\repeatcell{#1}{text=\c,transpose}}&#2\\ \ifblank{#3}{}{\hdashline[1.5pt/0.4pt] \parsetest #3\END}}
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{lX}\toprule
+% \expandafter\parsetest\temp\END
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% }
+%
+% The command \cs[\dg]{pgfkeysmeaning} is provided (with \cs{providecommand}): it expands to the meaning of the given pgfkey.
+%
+%
+% \subsection[/.blank]{Handler definition: \handler/.blank/}
+%
+% A new handler \handler/.blank/ is defined to allow automatic replacement of empty or blank values by the ``default'' value specified:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/base/path/my key$handler*/.code/=The key #1,%
+% /base/path/my key$handler/.default/=has its default value!,%
+% /base/path/my key$handler/.blank/=was left blank!}
+% \pgfkeys{/base/path/my key, ($nnn produces) The key has its default value!
+% /base/path/my key=} ($nnn produces) The key was left blank!
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% The following make blank value behave the same as default :
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/base/path/my key$handler/.blank/=\pgfkeysnovalue}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% And If you wish to forbid blank values you can add:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/base/path/my key$handler/.value required/}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% With \thispackage[interface-pgfkeys] it is also possible to give a \handler/.default/ or/and a \handler/.blank/
+% value to a handler, or on the other hand to say that a handler must have (\handler/.value required/)
+% or does not suffer (\handler/.value forbidden/) a value.
+% (this feature was not implemented in \xpackage{pgfkeys.code.tex}).
+%
+% \subsection[/.is private]{Handler definition: \handler/.is private/}
+%
+% This handler is mainly addressed to package writers. A private key does not suffer any assignment:
+% this is a package constant:
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/base/path/@my key$handler/.is private/=mypackage}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% Then any assignment to \textt{@my key} will throw an error, explaining
+% that \textt{@my key} is private to the package \xpackage{mypackage}.
+%
+% \bigskip
+% {\smaller Similarly, there is a \handler/.is private to class/ handler (for \cs{ClassError} instead of \cs{PackageError}).\par}
+%
+%
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% \subsection[/.store in cs, /.estore in cs]{Handler definition: \handler/.store in cs/ and \handler/.estore in cs/}
+% A new handler \handler/.store in cs/ is defined to store the value of a key in a named control sequence:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{%
+% /base/path/my key$handler/.store in cs/=some word,% ($nnn will define :) \"some word"
+% }
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \ClearPage
+% \subsection(/.true, /.false etc.)[Boolean keys: /.true, /.false, /.on /.off]{Handlers definition:: \handler/.true/, \handler/.false/, \handler/.on/\/ and \handler/.off/}
+%
+% A key of type \handler/.true/ or \handler/.false/ can take the only values \textt{true} or \textt{false} and
+% its default value is \textt{true}\linebreak (unless \handler*/.default/\textt{=false} is explicitly given to \cs{pgfkeys}).
+%
+% Similarly, a key of type \handler/.on/ or \handler/.off/ can take the only values \textt{on} or \textt{off} and
+% its default value is \textt{on}\linebreak (unless \handler*/.default/\textt{=off} is explicitly given to \cs{pgfkeys}).
+%
+% These are shortcuts and a special case of \handler/.is choice/ keys:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{
+% my key$handler/.true/ = $nnn code if the value is $texttt(true),
+% my key$handler/.false/ = $nnn code if the value is $texttt(false),
+% my key2$handler/.on/ = $nnn code if the value is $texttt(on),
+% my key2$handler/.off/ = $nnn code if the value is $texttt(off) }
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \subsection[/.is multiple choice]{Handler definition: \handler/.is multiple choice/}
+%
+% A key defined with \handler/.is multiple choice/ behaves like a \handler/.is choice/ key but more than
+% one choice can be selected at a time:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/path$handler*/.cd/,
+% format$handler/.is multiple choice/,
+% format/bold$handler*/.code/= ...,
+% format/italic$handler*/.code/= ...,
+% format/color$handler*/.code/= ... }
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% Possible values for key \textt{format} are restricted to subkeys: \textt{bold}, \textt{italic} and \textt{color}.
+% But unlike simple \handler/.is choice/ keys, it is possible to use:
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/path/format={bold,italic,color=...}}
+% ($nnn this is the same as:)
+% \pgfkeys{/path/format=bold,/path/format=italic,path/format={color=...}}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% {\itshape The \textt{bookmark} key of \csref[\red]{sectionformat} (in \thispackage[interface-titlesec]) is a good example.}
+%
+% \subsection[/.is enum]{Handler definition: \handler/.is enum/}
+%
+% A key defined with \handler/.is enum/ behaves like a \handler/.is choice/ key: its possible values are limited
+% to sub-keys. The name of the selected sub-key is stored into the key.
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/path$handler*/.cd/,
+% enumKey$handler/.is enum/={one,two,three}
+% }
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \textt[\opt]{enumKey} can be \textt{one} or \textt{two} or \textt{three} and nothing else.
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{ ($opt enumKey)=two }
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \topsep=0pt
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% assigns \textt{two} to the value of the key: \=\cs{pgfkeysvalueof}\M*{{\opt enumKey}} is \textt{two}.\\
+% \> \cs{pgfkeysvalueof}\M*{{\opt enumKey}\handler/.number/} is \texttbf{1} (zero based index)
+% \end{tabbing}
+%
+% \subsection[/.store as code]{Handlers definition: \handler/.store as code/, \handler/.estore as code/}
+%
+% This handler stores the value given to the key in the key itself. Furthermore, a starred key \stform* and a \stform+
+% keys are defined such that they append their value to the stored key.
+%
+% {\small
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/test$handler/.store as code/,
+% /test=some code,
+% /test$stform+= the following follows... }
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+% Defines the key \textt{/test} so that \cs{pgfkeysvalueof}\M*{/test} expands to \textt{some code}.
+% \textt{/test\stform+} appends ``the following follows'' to the previous value of the key.
+% (\textt{/test\stform*} does the same).
+%
+% If you prefer not to have star keys \stform*, or \stform+ keys, or only one of these, just say, for example:
+% {\small
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/test$handler/.store as code/=($rred+)}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+%
+% {\itshape This feature is very important for \thispackage: almost any \textt[\opt]{font} keys are defined
+% with the handler \handler/.store as code/.}
+%
+% {\smaller
+% \textitbf{A note for programmers:} \handler/.store as code/ defines three keys: \textt{test}, \textt{test}\stform+ and \textt{test}\stform*.
+% (The two former are the same). The ``\emph{append code}'' keys (\stform+ and \stform*) call the \emph{main key} \textt{test}.
+% This is handy because if you append code to the \emph{main key} (with \xpackage{pgfkeys} \handler/.add code/
+% or \handler/.append code/) then this code will be expanded also in case the \stform+ or \stform* keys are called.
+% }
+%
+% There is also a \handler/.estore as code/ handler which expands the given code before storing it in the key.
+%
+% \csdef{=cs-name}{{\lk$=$\meta{cs-name}}}
+% \subsection[/.store as code in cs]{Handlers definition: \handler/.store as code in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}, \handler/.estore as code in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% This handler works like \handler/.store as code/: the content is stored in the cs-name given as value for the handler,
+% but not inside the key itself (useful for \textt{key=value} interfaces to other packages).
+%
+% The \stform+ and \stform* keys are provided: both append their value to the content of the given control sequence.
+%
+% Typically, \textt[\opt]{/font} keys are defined this way for interface with other packages.
+%
+% There is also a \handler/.estore as code in cs/ handler which expands the given code before storing it in the {\lk\meta{cs-name}}..
+%
+% \subsection[/.store as color]{Handler definition: \handler/.store as color/}
+%
+% When specifying a color, did you say:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% color=\color{yellow} color=\normalcolor
+% color=blue color=[rgb]{1,0,0}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% In any case, \handler/.store as color/ will transform the value as follow:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% color=yellow color=default ($nnn defined by $thispackage* if not already)
+% color=blue color=[rgb]{1,0,0} ($nnn defined) \AtBeginDocument
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+%
+%
+% In any case, \handler/.store as color command/ will transform the value as follow:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% color=\normalcolor color=\color{yellow}
+% color=\color{blue} color=\color[rgb]{1,0,0}
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% Please! Dont write: \cs{def}\cs{myBlue}\M*{blue} \qquad \textt{color=\cs{myBlue}}.
+%
+% Use \cs{colorlet}\M*{myBlue}\M*{blue}\, instead, or \cs{definecolor}.
+%
+% As for code, the color is stored inside the key.
+%
+% \subsection[/.store as color in cs]{Handler definition: \handler/.store as color in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% The same as \handler/.store as color/, but the color is stored in the given control sequence, rather than in the key itself.
+%
+% There is also a \handler/.store as color command in cs/ handler. It is used to set the value to \cs{columnseprulecolor}
+% by the key \textt{columns/rule/color} of \csref[\red]{tocsetup}.
+%
+% \ClearPage
+%
+% \subsection[/.store as number]{Handlers definition: \handler/.store as number/, \handler/.estore as number/}
+%
+% \subsection[/.store as number in cs]{Handlers definition: \handler/.store as number in cs/, \handler/.estore as number in cs/}
+%
+% \ClearPage
+% \subsection(/.store as glue)[/.store as glue]{Handler definition: \handler/.store as glue/}
+%
+% This is quite the same as \handler/.store as code/, but the given code is sourrounded by \cs{glueexpr}...\cs{relax}...
+% and is stored inside the key.
+%
+% Furthermore:§
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% \qquad\= the \stform+ key adds to the length:\=\cs{glueexpr} old value $+$ \meta{ argument } \cs{relax}. \\
+% \> the \stform- key substracts:\>\cs{glueexpr} old value $-$ \meta{ argument } \cs{relax} \\
+% \> the \stform* key scales: \> \cs{glueexpr} old value $*$ \meta{ argument } \cs{relax} \\
+% \end{tabbing}§
+%
+% The \meta{argument} is \textbf{not expanded} but the content of the key is ready to be used in place
+% of a length. Scaling of two forms are allowed: \emph{fractionnal} and \emph{real}.
+% \emph{Real} scaling is converted to a fraction of \textt{65536}:
+% {\small
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \pgfkeys{/test$handler/.store as glue/,
+% /test=12pt plus5pt,
+% /test$stform*=.5,
+% /test$stform+=\parskip,
+% /test$stform*=4/6 }
+% \pgfkeysmeaning{/test}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% }
+% \pgfkeys{/test/.store as glue,/test=12pt plus5pt,/test*=.5,/test+=\parskip,/test*=4/6}
+%
+% \smex\qquad \pgfkeysmeaning{/test}
+%
+% The value of \cs{parskip} is not expanded at \cs{pgfkeys} time, but only when the value of the key
+% is used (for an assignment...)
+%
+% There is also a handler called \handler/.estore as glue/ if you really want the value to be
+% expanded (with \cs{the}) at the time of \cs{pgfkeys} setting.
+%
+%
+% \subsection(/.store as dimen)[/.store as dimen]{New handler: \handler/.store as dimen/}
+%
+% Just like \handler/.store as glue/ but with \cs{dimexpr} instead of \cs{glueexpr}.
+%
+% There is also a \handler/.estore as dimen/ handler, for immediate expansion.
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection(/.store as glue in cs)[/.store as glue in cs]{New handler: \handler/.store as glue in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% This is like \handler/.store as glue/ but the the value is assigned to a macro whose name is given, rather than
+% in the key itself. Expansion \emph{does not} occur \cs{pgfkeys} time: the macro contains
+% the glue definition in \cs{glueexpr}...\cs{relax} expressions.
+%
+% \stform+ (to add) \stform- (to substract) and \stform* (to scale) keys are provided.
+%
+% There is also a \handler/.estore as glue in cs/ handler, and expansion occurs when the key is set.
+%
+%
+% \subsection(/.store as dimen in cs)[/.store as dimen in cs]{New handler: \handler/.store as dimen in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% Just like \handler/.store as glue in cs/ but with \cs{dimexpr} instead of \cs{glueexpr}.
+% \goodbreak
+%
+% \bookmarksetup{color*=copper}
+% \subsection(/.estore as dimen in cs)[/.estore as dimen in cs]{New handler: \handler/.estore as dimen in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% This handler as a particularity: if the value is given without dimension, \textt[\db]{pt} is assumed (that is... \textt{points}).
+%
+% This is the way the key \textt[\opt]{size} is defined for the command \csref[\red]{changefont}
+% (in \thispackage[interfaces-LaTeX]).
+% \textt[\opt]{size} defines \cs{f@size}, the macro used by \LaTeX{} to store the font size
+% (and \textt{size}\stform+ adds, \textt{size}\stform- substracts, \textt{size}\stform* scales).
+% But \cs{f@size} is stored in points, without the mention of the dimension: \textt[\db]{pt}.
+%
+% With its default units in \textt[\db]{pt}, \handler/.estore as dimen in cs/ is the handler of the situation:
+%
+%
+% \Section[etoolbox](Interface etoolbox)[Interface etoolbox]{\sectitle{etoolbox} - \xpackage{etoolbox}-like commands}
+%
+% May be they will be added to \xpackage{etoolbox.sty} one day or another... and disapear from \thispackage $\smile$.
+%
+% \subsection{New macros provided with \cs{providecommand}}
+%
+% \begin{declcs*}{4}{removefrom}\,\,\,\meta{hook}\M{code} &&&\cs{removefromstart}\meta{hook}\M{code} \\
+% \cs{gremovefrom}\meta{hook}\M{code} &&& \cs{gremovefromstart}\meta{hook}\M{code} \\
+% \cs{eremovefrom}\meta{hook}\M{code} &&& \cs{eremovefromstart}\meta{hook}\M{code} \\
+% \cs{xremovefrom}\meta{hook}\M{code} &&& \cs{xremovefromstart}\meta{hook}\M{code}
+% \end{declcs*}
+%
+% \csbf{removefrom} removes the first occurence of \M{code} from a \meta{hook}. The command is robust.§
+% {\color{red}\M{code} should not contain groups: \M*{...}} but parameter characters are allowed, which need not to be doubled. The match for \M{code}
+% inside the replacement text of \meta{hook} is category-code sensitiv.
+%
+% \begin{tabbing}
+% If the \= first occurence of \= \M{code} into \meta{hook} has been removed \\
+% \> then \> \cs{ifin@}\quad\= is set to \cs{iftrue} \\
+% \> otherwise \> \cs{ifin@}\> is set to \cs{iffalse} \quad (\meta{hook} does not contain \M{code}). \\
+% this allows loops of the form:\\
+% \> \cs{in@true}\\
+% \> \cs{@whilesw}\cs{ifin@}\cs{fi}\M*{\cs{removefrom}\meta{hook}\M{code}}
+% \end{tabbing}
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}[label={\HR},leftmargin=*]
+% \item \cs{eremovefrom} and \cs{xremovefrom} expand \M{code} before trying to remove it from \meta{hook}. Only \M{code} is expanded, the current replacement text of \meta{hook} is not.
+% \item \texttbf g and \texttbf x versions make the assignment to \meta{hook} global.
+% \item \cs{removefromstart} remove \M{code} only if it appears at the very beginning of \meta{hook}.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \Section[scrlfile](Interface scrlfile)[Interface scrlfile]{\sectitle[\LocalOrCTAN{file:C:/texmf/source/latex/koma-script/scrlfile.pdf}{\CTANbaseurl/macros/latex/contrib/koma-script/scrguien.pdf}]{scrlfile}}
+%
+% \subsection{Star forms for \cs{BeforeFile} and \cs{AfterFile}}
+%
+% \xpackage{scrlfile} provides \cs{BeforeFile} and \cs{AfterFile} in order to execute some code when a file is loaded.
+% The hooks are automatically reset to \cs{relax} after the file has been loaded, in other words, they are expanded at most one only time.
+% This can be avoided by using \cs{BeforeFile\stform*} and \cs{AfterFile\stform*}, for example:
+%
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \BeforeFile($rred$textasteriskcentered){\jobname.toc}{\begin{multicols}{2}}
+% \AfterFile($rred$textasteriskcentered){\jobname.toc}{\end{multicols}}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% The hooks \textsl{before} and \textsl{after} will be executed \textbf{every time} \cs{jobname.toc} is loaded.
+%
+% This feature is used in \cs[\red]{tocsetup}\M*{twocolumns}.
+%
+% \subsection{Allowing \cs{BeforeFile} and \cs{AfterFile} when \cs{@input} is invoked}
+%
+% The hooks \cs{BeforeFile} and \cs{AfterFile} are executed only when the file is loaded with \cs{InputIfFileExists}: indeed this macro is
+% redefined by \xpackage{scrlfile}.
+%
+% \thispackage redefine \cs{@input} in order to execute those hooks also in case \cs{@input} is used: this is useful because
+% \xext{toc} files are input with \cs{@input} rather than with \cs{InputIfFileExists}.
+%
+% \sectionformat\section{bookmark={color*=dr}}
+% \section{List of corrected or patched commands}
+%
+% Here is the complete list of patched commands in other packages.
+%
+% The modification occurs only if the given module of \thispackage is loaded.
+% For example, \cs{addcontentsline} is modified only if packages \xpackage{titlesec} and \xpackage{bookmark} are
+% loaded, \textitbf{and if} \thispackage[interface-titlesec] and \thispackage[interface-bookmark] are loaded.
+%
+% \makeatletter \newcounter{PatchedCommand}
+% \newcolumntype\X{>{\centering\arraybackslash}X}
+% \newrobustcmd\PatchedCommand[4][]{\begingroup\small \stepcounter{PatchedCommand}%
+% \hbox{\llap{\ding{\number\numexpr181+\value{PatchedCommand}}\,\,}
+% \begin{tabularx}\linewidth{|\X|c|\X|\X|c|}\hline
+% Patched command &Type & Importance &Module & ref. page \\\hline
+% \makecell[l]{\repeatcell{#2}{text=\csbf[\macrocodecolor]{\c},transpose}}
+% &
+% \zref@ifrefundefined{patch-\itf@getvalue{#2}1}
+% {}
+% {\itshape\zref[patchtype]{patch-\itf@getvalue{#2}1}}%
+% & \ifcase#4\relax \textcolor{dg}{\makecell{minor \\ optimisation or correction}}
+% \or \textcolor{db}{\makecell{important\\ but no side effect}}
+% \or \textcolor{dr}{\makecell{important}}
+% \or {\bfseries\textcolor{red}{major}}
+% \else ??
+% \fi
+% &
+% \makecell{\repeatcell{#3}{transpose,text=\thispackage[{\c}]}}
+% &
+% \zref@ifrefundefined{patch-\itf@getvalue{#2}1}
+% {}
+% {\pageref{patch-\itf@getvalue{#2}1}}%
+% \\ \hline
+% \end{tabularx}}\endgroup}
+% \makeatother
+%
+% \begingroup\smaller
+%
+% \subsection[LaTeX]{\LaTeX{}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[LaTeX]{@pkgextension,@clsextension,@ifpackageloaded,@ifclassloaded}{interfaces-LaTeX}{0}
+%
+% Those commands are replaced by their equivalent in the package \xpackage{ltxcmds}:
+%
+% \begin{tabular}{*{4}{c}}
+% \repeatcell{ltx@pkgextension,ltx@clsextension,ltx@ifpackageloaded,ltx@ifclassloaded}{text=\cs{\c}}
+% \end{tabular}
+%
+% This is because \LaTeX{} defines those commands \cs{@onlypreamble}, while the equivalent macros in \xpackage{ltxcmds}
+% can be used inside \textt{document} as well.
+%
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[LaTeX]{addcontentsline}{interface-titlesec,interface-bookmark}{1}
+%
+% \cs{addcontentsline} does a lot a thing and in particular it expands the \cs{bookmark} command (if the \xpackage{bookmark} package is loaded,
+% otherwise it's hyperref). As long as \cs[\red]{sectionformat} can drive the attributes of the bookmark for each section, it is necessary
+% to expand \cs{bookmarksetup} with the right options before the section-bookmark is written.
+%
+% This is achived by \cs{itf@ttl@BKM}, placed at the beginning of \cs{addcontentsline}.
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[LaTeX]{@input}{interface-scrlfile}{1}
+%
+% The \cs{input} primitive (saved by \LaTeX{} in control sequence \cs{@@input}) is surrounded by
+% \cs{scr@load@hook}\M*{before}...\cs{scr@load@hook}\M*{after}:
+%
+% \begin{multicols}{2}
+% Original:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \def\@input#1{\IfFileExists{#1}
+% {\@@input\@filef@und}
+% {\typeout{No file #1.}}%
+% }%
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \columnbreak
+% Modified:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \renewcommand*\@input[1]{\IfFileExists{#1}
+% {\scr@load@hook{before}{#1}%
+% \@@input\@filef@und
+% \scr@load@hook{after}{#1}}
+% {\typeout{No file #1.}}%
+% }%
+% \end{Verb*}
+% \end{multicols}
+%
+% \subsection[array]{\xpackage{array}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[array]{prepnext@tok}{interfaces-makecell}{1}
+%
+% \cs{prepnext@tok} is replaced by \cs{itf@prepnext@tok} for the purpose of inserting \cs{itf@celllalign} and \cs{itfcellleft}
+% at the left edge of each cell in a tabular and \cs{itf@cellright} \cs{itf@cellralign} at the right edge of each cell.
+%
+% This allows \cs{rowfont} to change the font (and optionally the alignment) for all cells in a tabular or array row.
+%
+% \subsection[bookmark]{\xpackage{bookmark} \cs{\backslashchar bookmark}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[bookmark]{bookmark}{interface-bookmark}{2}
+%
+% The \stform* keys for \cs{bookmarksetup} (\textt{italic\stform*},\, \textt{color\stform*},\, \textt{bold\stform*},\, and \textt{disable\stform*})
+% are local to the group, but govern only the very next bookmark.
+%
+% After the bookmark has been written, previous values must be restored at the end of each group until
+% the same group level as the one in which the \stform* option has been set is reach (if this group is the main group,
+% level \textt0, then a global assignment is made).
+%
+% Well... this is done at \cs{write}: \cs{immediate}\cs{write}\M*{the bookmark entry}
+% is replaced by \cs{itf@BKM@write}\M*{the bookmark entry} to check first:
+% \begin{enumerate}[label=\arabic*)\,]
+% \item is the bookmark disable ?
+% \item is it necessary to restore previous values after write (\ie \cs{aftergroup}) ?
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% \ClearPage
+% \subsection[colortbl]{\xpackage{colortbl}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[colortbl]{CT@cellc,endarray}{interface-makecell}{1}
+%
+% \xpackage{colortbl} modifies the preamble of tabulars: it put each cell in a box, sets the color and then displays the box.
+% The example shown page \pageref{repeatcell:colors} does not work without a minor modification: the color specification must
+% be expanded short before their usage.
+%
+% Original:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \def\CT@cellc#1[#2]#3{%
+% \expandafter($red(\gdef))\expandafter\CT@cell@color\expandafter{%
+% \expandafter\CT@color#1{[#2]}{#3}%
+% \global\let\CT@cell@color\relax
+% }}
+% \end{Verb*}
+% Modified:
+% \begin{Verb*}
+% \def\CT@cellc#1[#2]#3{% #1 is either \@firstofone or \@gobble, [#2]#3 = color spec
+% ($red(\xdef))\CT@cell@color{\noexpand\CT@color#1{[{#2}]}{#3}%
+% \global\let\noexpand\CT@cell@color\relax}%
+% }
+% \end{Verb*}
+%
+% \csbf{endarray}: missed \cs{@arrayleft} in the redefinition of \xpackage{colortbl}, then
+% compatibility with \xpackage{delarray} is broken. Bug fixed by \thispackage[interfaces-base].
+%
+% Same problem for \xpackage{arydshln} who redefines \cs{endarray}, taking care of \xpackage{colortbl}
+% but not of \xpackage{delarray}. Bug fixed by \thispackage[interfaces-base].
+%
+% Remember \xpackage{arydshln} must be loaded after \xpackage{colortbl} (this is not due to \thispackage,
+% but to the fact that both redefine \cs{@classz} from the \xpackage{array} package).
+%
+% \subsection[hypbmsec]{\xpackage{hypbmsec}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[hypbmsec]{hbs@do,hbs@process}{interfaces-hypbmsec,interfaces-titlesec}{1}
+%
+% In order to get \cs{lastsectiontitle}, \cs{lastsectionbookmark} and \cs{lastsectiontoc} updated at the right place
+% (\ie \textit{after} \cs{sectionbreak} and \textit{before} \cs{sectionmark}), some \thispackage-macros have to be
+% executed:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item at the beginning of \cs{hbs@do} \qquad {\smaller\smex to get the word \textt{section} or \textt{subsection} \etc.}
+% \item at the beginning of \cs{hbs@process} \qquad {\smaller\smex to store the next section title, bookmark and toc}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[hypbmsec]{ttl@select}{interfaces-hypbmsec,interfaces-titlesec}{1}
+%
+% The update of \cs{lastsectiontitle}, \cs{lastsectionbookmark} and \cs{lastsectiontoc} occurs at the beginning of \cs{ttl@select}.
+% At that time, those macros receive the values for the current section that were stored at the beginning of \cs{hbs@process}.
+%
+% \subsection[enumitem]{\xpackage{enumitem}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[enumitem]{setlist}{interfaces-enumitem}{0}
+%
+% \cs{setlist} is redefined by \thispackage[interfaces-enumitem] in order to extend the syntax.
+%
+% \subsection[pgfkeys]{\xfile{pgfkeys.code.tex}}
+%
+% \PatchedCommand[pgfkeys]{pgfkeys@unpack,pgfkeys@case@three,pgfkeys@exp@call}{interfaces-pgfkeys}{2}
+%
+% \cs{pgfkeys@unpack} is modified to handle the case of the \handler/.blank/ handler: this is here that
+% the value is conditionnally compared against \handler/.default/, \handler/.blank/ or \handler/.value required/.
+%
+% \cs{pgfkeys@case@three} is modified to allow \underline{handlers} to have \handler/.default/, \handler/.blank/
+% or \handler/.value required/ values.
+%
+% \cs{pgfkeys@exp@call}: missed a pair of braces around the value in \cs{pgfkeysalso}. Thus
+% the code could break if the value contains an equal sign or a comma. Fixed.
+%
+%
+% \endgroup ^^A \smaller
+% \bookmarksetup{bold=false,color=black}
+%
+%
+%
+%
+% \StopEventually{
+% }
+%
+% \IMPLEMENTATION
+%
+% \sectionformat\subsection{bookmark/color=pkgcolor}
+% \subsection{Interfaces}
+%
+% The package namespace is \textttbf{\db itf@}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces}
+ [2010/10/20 v1.0 - pgfkeys macros for other packages (FC)]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Requirements}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{The package options / list of interfaces}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{LaTeX}{\AtEndOfPackage{\LoadInterface{LaTeX}}}
+\DeclareOption{marks}{\AtEndOfPackage{\LoadInterface{marks}}}
+\def\itf@tp#1{%
+ \DeclareOption{#1}{\AtEndOfPackage{\LoadInterface{#1}}}%
+}% \itf@tp
+\itf@tp{titlesec}
+\itf@tp{hyperref}
+\itf@tp{bookmark}
+\itf@tp{fancyhdr}
+\itf@tp{tocloft}
+\itf@tp{makecell}
+\itf@tp{enumitem}
+\itf@tp{hypbmsec}
+\itf@tp{environ}
+\itf@tp{truncate}
+\itf@tp{appendix}
+\itf@tp{embedfile}
+\itf@tp{fancyvrb}
+\if\relax\@ptionlist{interfaces.sty}\relax % no option given
+ \ExecuteOptions\@declaredoptions % all interfaces are active
+\fi
+\ProcessOptions
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Interfaces-base}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*base>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-base}
+ [2010/10/10 v1.0 Basic macros for interfaces package (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{etex,ltxcmds,etoolbox,pgfkeys,scrlfile}
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-etoolbox}%
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-scrlfile}%
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-pgfkeys}
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-tikz}%
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-umrand}% There is a \BeforePackage here !
+}% AtEndOfPackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LoadInterface}
+% Mechanic of \thispackage: each module is loaded \cs{AfterPackage}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\LoadInterface[1]{%
+ \@for\itf@tp:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\ifcsname\itf@tp\endcsname
+ \itf@tp\else relax\fi\endcsname\marks
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-marks}%
+ \else\expandafter\ifx\csname\ifcsname\itf@tp\endcsname
+ \itf@tp\else relax\fi\endcsname\LaTeX
+ \RequirePackage{interfaces-LaTeX}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\itf@LoadInterface\expandafter{\itf@tp}%
+ \fi\fi}%
+}% \LoadInterface
+\@onlypreamble\LoadInterface
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@LoadInterface[1]{\ltx@ifpackageloaded{interfaces-#1}
+ {}
+ {\AfterPackage*{#1}{\RequirePackage{interfaces-#1}}}%
+}% \itf@LoadInterface
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@Check@Package[1]{\ltx@ifpackageloaded{#1}
+ {}
+ {\PackageError{interfaces-#1}
+ {The package `#1` must be loaded before `interfaces-#1`
+ \MessageBreak Please refer to `interfaces.pdf` document
+ \MessageBreak for correct usage of the `interfaces` package}\@ehd
+ }%
+}% \itf@Check@Package
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@AfterPackage}
+% This is \cs{AfterPackage}\stform* but it works inside document.
+% \xpackage{ltxcmds} provides \cs{ltx@ifpackageloaded} to check if a package is loaded
+% and -- unlike \LaTeX's \cs{@ifpackageloaded} -- this macros is not restricted to the document preamble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@AfterPackage[1]{%
+ \csname\ltx@ifpackageloaded{#1}{ltx@secondoftwo}{@AfterPackage}\endcsname{#1}%
+}% \itf@AfterPackage
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bug Fixes}
+%
+% David Carlisle's \xpackage{colortbl} is not compatible with David Carlisle's \xpackage{delarray}!!
+%
+% Bug Fixed by \thispackage[interfaces-base]. At the same time, the bug exist as well in \xpackage{arydshln}
+% and we fix it.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\endarray}
+% \patchlabel{endarray}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AfterPackage*{colortbl}{%
+ \renewcommand*\endarray{%
+ \crcr \egroup \egroup \@arrayright \gdef\@preamble{}\CT@end}%
+}% AfterPackage colortbl
+\AfterPackage*{arydshln}{%
+ \ltx@ifpackageloaded{colortbl}
+ {% colortbl
+ \def\endarray{%
+ \adl@endarray \egroup \adl@arrayrestore \CT@end \egroup %<original>
+ \@arrayright % <FC>
+ \gdef\@preamble{}% <FC>
+ }%
+ }
+ {% no colortbl
+ \def\endarray{%
+ \adl@endarray \egroup \adl@arrayrestore \egroup %<original>
+ \@arrayright % <FC>
+ \gdef\@preamble{}% <FC>
+ }%
+ }%
+}% AfterPackage arydshln
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Interfaces patches}
+%
+% First a warning for loading \xpackage{arydshln} after \xpackage{colortbl}.
+% Those packages does not interact properly.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AfterPackage{colortbl}{%
+ {\ltx@ifpackageloaded{arydshln}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-base}
+ {The package arydshln should be loaded after colortbl
+ \MessageBreak because both redefine \string\@classz}}%
+ {}}%
+}% AfterPackage colortbl
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@preapptocmd}
+% The need for this macro has rised to make \cs{itf@patch} simpler.
+%
+% This is also more secure to do \cs{pretocmd} and \cs{apptocmd} in
+% the same time, for the result (success or failure) is always the
+% same for both.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@preapptocmd[5]{%
+ \pretocmd#1{#2}%
+ {\apptocmd#1{#3}%
+ {#4}%
+ {#5}}%
+ {#5}%
+}% \itf@preapptocmd
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@patch}
+% \cs{itf@patch} is used as a prefix to \cs{pretocmd}, \cs{apptocmd} and \cs{patchcmd}.
+%
+% It's main purpose is to keep the information (\cs{PackageInfo}) in the case
+% \usepackage*{interfaces} has been put in a \cs{dump} format.
+%
+% \cs{PackageInfo} is then deferred \cs{AtBeginDocument} time...
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@patch{\futurelet\itf@tp\itf@patch@}
+\def\itf@patch@{\csname itf@patch@%
+ \ifx\itf@tp\patchcmd inside\else
+ \ifx\itf@tp\itf@preapptocmd inside\else
+ boundary\fi\fi
+ \endcsname
+}% \itf@patch@
+\def\itf@patch@boundary#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \let\itf@tp#2%
+ #1\itf@tp{#3}%
+ {\let#2\itf@tp
+ \AtBeginDocument{#4}% in order to keep this info even after \dump
+ }
+ {#5}%
+}% \itf@patch@boundary (for \pretocmd and \apptocmd)
+\def\itf@patch@inside#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \let\itf@tp#2%
+ #1\itf@tp{#3}{#4}%
+ {\let#2\itf@tp
+ \AtBeginDocument{#5}%
+ }
+ {#6}%
+}% \itf@patch@inside (for \patchcmd)
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Helper macros}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\itf@sk
+\newmuskip\itf@musk
+\newtoks\itf@tk
+\newcount\itf@cnt
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@strip@at}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@strip@dot}
+% \cs{itf@strip@at} removes all until \textt @\, while \cs{itf@strip@dot} removes the fractional part.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% H E L P E R M A C R O S
+\begingroup\makeatother
+ \csgdef{itf@strip@at}#1@{}
+\endgroup
+\def\itf@strip@dot#1.#2\@nil{#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@expandonceifcs}
+% This macro is used to expand or not a comma separated list.§
+% USAGE: \cs{itf@expandonceifcs}\cs{macrototest}§
+% \cs{macrototest} is expanded once and its first token $\tau$ is placed into a temporary macro \cs{itf@tp}.§
+% If \cs{macrotest} equals \cs{itf@tp}: \cs{macrotest} is composed of that only token $\tau$, otherwise we leave and do nothing.§
+% Then we test \cs{noexpand}$\tau$ against \cs{relax} with \cs{ifcat}. If \textt{false} $\tau$ cannot be a macro then we leave.§
+% Then we test if $\tau$ is expandable: \cs{ifx}$\tau$=\cs{expandonce}$\tau$, $\tau$ is not expandable and we leave.
+% (may be \cs{def}$\tau$\M*{$\tau$} but it's not \textit{expandable}!).§
+% Otherwise,$\tau$ is expandable and \cs{macrotest} contains a single expandable token.
+% Thus \cs{macrotest} shall be expanded once:\, \cs{let}\cs{macrotest}=$\tau$.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@expandonceifcs#1{\expandafter\itf@exp@ndonceifcs\expandafter#1#1Q\@nnil}
+\def\itf@exp@ndonceifcs#1#2#3\@nnil{%
+ \def\itf@tp{#2}%
+ \ifx\itf@tp#1%
+ \ifcat\relax\noexpand#2%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\remove@to@nnil
+ \expandafter\ifx\expandafter#2#2\@nnil\else\@nnil\let#1#2\fi
+ \fi\fi
+}% \itf@exp@ndonceifcs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Numbers}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@number}
+% \cs{itf@number} tries to get a number from its argument, and stores the result
+% into the TeX count register given as first argument. Same syntax as \LaTeX \cs{@defaultunits}.
+%
+% A number is an integer that can be assigned to a count register, may be followed
+% by one or more \cs{relax}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% G E T A N U M B E R (if possible)
+%% USAGE: \itf@number\count<text>\relax\@nnil (like \@defaultunits)
+\def\itf@number#1#2\relax\@nnil{% \relax is to mimick the syntax of \@defaultunits
+ \afterassignment\itf@number@#1\number0#2\relax\itf@number@
+}
+\def\itf@number@#1\relax#2\itf@number@{%
+ \ifblank{#1}
+ {\itf@number@@{}#2\itf@number@@\@nnil
+ \csname ltx@\ifx\@let@token\itf@number@@
+ first\else second\fi oftwo\endcsname}
+ \ltx@secondoftwo
+}% \itf@number@
+\def\itf@number@@#1{\futurelet\@let@token\itf@number@@@}
+\def\itf@number@@@{%
+ \csname \ifx\@let@token\relax itf@number@@%
+ \else remove@to@nnil%
+ \fi \endcsname
+}% \itf@number@@@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Units and math units}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@strip@mu}
+%
+% This is the equivalent of \LaTeX's \cs{strip@pt} but for math units:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% U N I T S F O R D I M E N S
+\def\itf@strip@mu{\expandafter\itf@rem@mu\the}
+\begingroup \@makeother\M\@makeother\U
+ \lowercase{%
+ \gdef\itf@rem@mu#1.#2MU{#1\ifnum#2>\z@.#2\fi}%
+ }%
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@units@pttomu}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@units@mutopt}
+%
+% $1 mu$ is exactly $1 em / 18$ where the $em$ is taken from \cs{textfont}2.
+%
+% Thus the scaling: \cs{fontdimen}$6$\cs{textfont}$2*100/1800$.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \skip = \itf@units@mutopt \muskip
+\def\itf@units@pttomu#1{\gluetomu\glueexpr
+ \glueexpr#1\relax*1800/%
+ \expandafter\itf@strip@dot\the\dimexpr
+ \fontdimen6\textfont2*100\relax.\@nil
+ \relax
+}% \itf@units@pttomu
+\def\itf@units@mutopt#1{\glueexpr
+ \mutoglue\muexpr#1\relax*
+ \expandafter\itf@strip@dot\the\dimexpr
+ \fontdimen6\textfont2*100\relax.\@nil/1800
+ \relax
+}% \itf@units@mutopt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@units@mu}
+%
+% Forces a dimension to be expressed in terms of math units ($mu$), convert if needed.
+% \cs{cftdotsep} in \xpackage{tocloft}
+% is expressed in math units.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \muskip = \itf@units@mu{ \skip or \muskip or number}
+\def\itf@units@mu#1#2{\begingroup\@makeother\P
+ \@makeother\T\@makeother\S\@makeother\B\@makeother\C
+ \@makeother\M\@makeother\D\@makeother\I\@makeother\N
+ \edef\itf@tp{#2}%
+ \lowercase{\@tfor\x:={PT}{PC}{IN}{BP}{CM}{MM}{DD}{CC}{SP}\do}{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@\x\itf@tp\ifin@\expandafter\@break@tfor\fi
+ }%
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \ifin@
+ #1=\itf@units@pttomu{#2}%
+ \else
+ \@defaultunits#1 #2mu\relax\@nnil
+ \fi
+}% \itf@units@mu
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@units@pt}
+%
+% Conversely, forces a unit to be expressed in terms of points. Convert (from $mu$) if needed.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \skip = \itf@units@pt( \muskip or \skip or number )
+\def\itf@units@pt#1#2{\begingroup\@makeother\M\@makeother\U
+ \lowercase{\@expandtwoargs\in@{MU}}{#2}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \ifin@
+ #1=\itf@units@mutopt{#2}%
+ \else
+ \@defaultunits#1 #2pt\relax\@nnil
+ \fi
+}% \itf@units@pt
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@units@scale}
+%
+% For multiplication of units: \cs{glueexpr}...\cs{relax}*\cs{itf@units@scale}\meta{scaling factor}!
+%
+% The scaling factor can be a fraction or a real number. Real numbers are approximated by a fraction
+% of 65536.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% glue * 1.5 = glue * 98302 / 65536
+%% glue * 3/2 = glue * 3/2
+\def\itf@units@scale#1!{\itf@units@scale@normalize#1/\@nnil/\@nil}
+\def\itf@units@scale@normalize#1/#2/#3\@nil{%
+ \ifx#2\@nnil
+ \number\dimexpr#1pt\relax/65536
+ \else#1/#2
+ \fi
+}% \itf@units@normalize
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default color}
+%
+% A trick about \cs{normalcolor}, which refers to \cs{default@color}:
+%
+% \cs{default@color} is not expressed in terms of a color model. Therefore, it is not
+% possible to convert it into a universally correct parameter for the \cs{color} command.
+% That's why, for example, \cs{bookmark} ignore blank parameter for \textt{color}: because
+% it can do nothing with \cs{normalcolor} !
+%
+% Solution: if a color named ``\textt{default}'' has been defined in the preamble, then it is
+% used as the default color. Otherwise, we define, \cs{AtBeginDocument} a color named ``default''
+%
+% If \xpackage{xcolor} is loaded, an assignment: \cs{colorlet}\M*{default}\M*{.} is made
+% \cs{AtBeginDocument}. If only \xpackage{color} is loaded, then \cs{color}\M*{default}
+% means \cs{color}\M*{\cs{default@color}} (this syntax is not admissible with \xpackage{xolor},
+% but it works with \xpackage{color}).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ltx@ifpackageloaded{xcolor}
+ {\@ifundefinedcolor{default}
+ {\colorlet{default}{.}}
+ {}}%
+ {\ltx@ifpackageloaded{color}
+ {\@ifundefined{\string\color @default}
+ {\expandafter\def\csname\string\color @default\endcsname{\default@color}}
+ {}}%
+ {}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</base>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[LaTeX]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*LaTeX>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-LaTeX}
+ [2010/10/10 v1.0 pgfkeys macros for LaTeX (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{changefont}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\changefont}
+% First use of \cs{pgfkeys} handlers \handler/.store as glue in cs/ , \handler/.estore as dimen in cs/...
+% The handlers create the \stform+\, \stform-\, and \stform*\, keys automatically. As far as the
+% \stform+\, \stform-\, and \stform* keys invoke the main key, it is possible to \handler/.append code/
+% to the main key, without taking care of the \stform+\, \stform-\, and \stform*\, keys.
+%
+% The \handler/.alias\stform*/ handler creates the aliases for the main key and
+% the \stform+\, \stform-\, and \stform*\, keys in one shot.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\changefont[1]{\itf@pgfkeys
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/LaTeX/changefont}{#1}\selectfont
+}% \changefont
+\AfterPackage*{hyperref}
+ {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{\let\changefont\@gobble}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/LaTeX/changefont}{%
+ encoding/.code=\fontencoding{#1},encoding/.value required,%
+ enc/.alias=encoding,%
+ family/.code=\fontfamily{#1},family/.value required,%
+ fam/.alias=family,%
+ series/.code=\fontseries{#1},series/.value required,%
+ ser/.alias=series,%
+ shape/.code=\fontshape{#1},shape/.value required,%
+ sha/.alias=shape,%
+ size/.estore as dimen in cs=f@size,%
+ size/.append code=\set@fontsize\f@linespread\f@size\f@baselineskip,%
+ siz/.alias*=size,%
+ baselineskip/.store as glue in cs=f@baselineskip,%
+ baselineskip/.append code=\set@fontsize\f@linespread\f@size\f@baselineskip,%
+ skip/.alias*=baselineskip,%
+ linespread/.estore as dimen in cs=f@linespread,%
+ linespread/.add code={\ifx\f@linespread\@empty\let\f@linespread\@ne\fi}%
+ {\edef\f@linespread{\expandafter\rem@pt\f@linespread}%
+ \set@fontsize\f@linespread\f@size\f@baselineskip},%
+ linespread+/.prefix code=\ifx\f@linespread\@empty\let\f@linespread\@ne\fi,%
+ linespread-/.prefix code=\ifx\f@linespread\@empty\let\f@linespread\@ne\fi,%
+ linespread*/.prefix code=\ifx\f@linespread\@empty\let\f@linespread\@ne\fi,%
+ spread/.alias*=linespread,%
+}% \pgfkeys definitions for \changefont
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{rowfont}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\rowfont}
+%
+% \cs{rowfont} uses the control sequences \cs{itf@celllalign}, \cs{itf@cellleft}, \cs{itf@cellright}\linebreak
+% and \cs{itf@cellralign} which have been placed on purpose into the user-defined tokens inserted
+% in any preamble by the \xpackage{array} package.
+%
+% \cs{itf@celllalign} and \cs{itf@cellralign} are used to modify the alignment. If the optional
+% \M[alignment] parameter of \cs{rowfont} is not specified, then those control sequence expand
+% to \cs{@empty}.
+%
+% \cs{itf@cellleft} contains the font-modification information.
+%
+% Placement of those control sequences into the user-tokens that are inserted in the preamble
+% by the \xpackage{array} package is explained below under the macro \cs{itf@prepnext@tok}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\itf@everycr@tok % better than colortbl turnaround for \everycr
+\newcommand*\rowfont{\noalign{\ifnum0=`}\fi\itf@rowfont}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@rowfont[2][]{%
+ \global\itf@everycr@tok\everycr
+ \global\let\itf@@cellleft\itf@cellleft
+ \global\let\itf@@cellright\itf@cellright
+ \gdef\itf@cellfont{#2}%
+ \ifcsname itf@cell@#1\endcsname % row alignment
+ \csname itf@cell@#1\endcsname
+ \else\lowercase{%
+ \ifcsname itf@cell@#1\endcsname
+ \csname itf@cell@#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ }\fi
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\itf@cellfont}% inside \noalign group ok
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+ \global\everycr\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\everycr\expandafter\itf@rowfont@reset}%
+ \ifnum0=`{\fi}% end of noalign group
+}% \rowfont
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@rowfont@reset}
+% This macro resets \cs{itf@celllalign},\, \cs{itf@cellleft},\, \cs{itf@cellright},\, \cs{itf@cellralign}\, and\,
+% \cs{everycr} to the value they had before the expansion of \cs{rowfont}.
+%
+% It expands when a new row is inserted into the tabular or array.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@rowfont@reset{%
+ \noalign{%
+ \global\let\itf@cellleft\itf@@cellleft
+ \global\let\itf@cellright\itf@@cellright
+ \global\let\itf@cellfont\@empty
+ \global\let\itf@celllalign\@empty
+ \global\let\itf@cellralign\@empty
+ \global\everycr\itf@everycr@tok
+ \global\itf@everycr@tok{}%
+ }%
+}% \itf@rowfont@reset
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@prepnext@tok}
+% \patchlabel[prepend]{prepnext@tok}\label{itf@prepnext@tok}
+%
+% \cs{itf@prepnext@tok} will replace \cs{prepnext@tok} (in \xfile{array.sty}): its purpose is to add
+% the control sequences \cs{itf@celllalign},\, \cs{itf@cellleft},\, \cs{itf@cellright}\, and\, \cs{itf@cellralign}\,
+% at the right position in the ``preamble'' for \cs{halign}. Those control sequences are not inserted directly
+% into the preamble, but by the means of the user-tokens placed there by the \xpackage{array} package.
+%
+% The package \xpackage{array} defines a macro \cs{prenext@tok} to initialize each user-token
+% inserted at both side of each ``normal'' column. For ``special`' \texttbf @ and \texttbf ! columns,
+% there is only one token. \topsep=0pt
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tikzpicture}
+% \node (L) at (1,1) {$\underbrace{\hbox{>\M*{\cs{bfseries}\cs{color}\M*{red}}}}$}
+% node [anchor=west] (r) at (L.east) {\raise.5ex\hbox{\larger r}}
+% node [anchor=west] (R) at (r.east) {$\underbrace{\hbox{<\M*{\cs{color}\M*{black}\cs ,\cs\$}}}$}
+% node [anchor=center] at (L.south) {\cs{toks}<$i$>}
+% node [anchor=center] at (R.south) {\cs{toks}<$i+1$>};
+% \end{tikzpicture}
+% \end{center}
+%
+% When a column is inserted in the tabular preamble (\cs{@preamble}), the \TeX{} counter \cs{count@}
+% is equal to $i+1$ (\ie the right token) and the counter \cs{@tempcnta} is equal to $i$ (\ie the left token).
+% If the column is special (\ie \texttbf @ or \texttbf !) \cs{@tempcnta} is not updated.
+%
+% Thus, when a new token is ``prepared'' by \cs{prepnext@tok}:
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[either: $\mathbf{i=}$\cs{count@}$\,=$\cs{@tempcnta}]: the token to prepare (\ie \cs{toks}$<i+1>$)
+% is the right one of a ``normal'' column. The switch \cs{ifitf@cellright} is set to \textt{true}. \\
+% The \emph{previous} token (\cs{toks}$<i>=$\cs{toks}\cs{count@}) is necessarily the left one of this ``normal'' column:
+% we prepend \cs{itf@celllalign} and append \cs{itf@cellleft} to this token (\cs{toks}$<i>$).
+% This token is finished and will not changed afterwards.
+%
+% \item[or: $\mathbf{i=}$\cs{count@}$\,=$\cs{@tempcnta}$+1$]: the token to prepare (\cs{toks}$<i+1>$) is either the left one of a normal column,
+% or the single one of a special\, \texttbf @ or \texttbf !\, column.\\
+% If the switch \cs{ifitf@cellright} is true, then the \emph{previous} token \cs{toks}$<i>$ is the right one of the last inserted column
+% (which was a ``normal'' column, thus):, \cs{itf@cellright}\cs{itf@cellralign}\, is appended to it, and the switch
+% \cs{ititf@cellright} is reset to \texttt{false}.
+% May be \cs{prepnext@tok} will be expanded again (by \cs{save@decl}): if it happens,
+% then again\, \cs{count@}$\,=$\cs{@tempcnta}$+1$\, (same case) but \cs{ifitf@cellright} is \textt{false} and nothing is changed.
+%
+% \item[else:] The token to prepare (which is \cs{toks}$<i+1>=$\cs{toks}\cs{count@}$+1$), cannot be the right one of a ``normal'' column:
+% \cs{ifitf@cellright} is set to \textt{false}. \\
+% The fact that\, $\vert$\cs{count@}$-$\cs{@tempcnta}$\vert>1$\, tells us that the previous token \cs{toks}$<i>$
+% is necessarily the single one of a ``special''\, \texttbf @ or \texttbf !\, column. We don't modify this token, as
+% long as \emph{special columns are always inserted as is}:\, \cs{rowcolor} has no effect on special
+% columns, nor\, \cs{rowfont}.
+% \end{description}
+% Thereafter, the original initialisation sequence occurs: \cs{advance}\cs{count@}\textt{ by}\cs{@ne} and initialize the token
+% to prepare (\cs{toks}\cs{count@}$\,=$\cs{toks}$<i+1>$) to an empty one.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifitf@cellright
+\def\itf@prepnext@tok{% only if array is loaded
+ \itf@cnt = \count@
+ \advance \itf@cnt -\@tempcnta
+ \ifcase \itf@cnt % (case 0): previous token is left
+ \itf@cellrighttrue % consequently the token to prepare is right !
+ \toks\count@\expandafter{% augment the previous (left) token
+ \expandafter\itf@celllalign
+ \the\toks\count@
+ \itf@cellleft}%
+ \or % (case 1)
+ \ifitf@cellright % previous token is right
+ \itf@cellrightfalse% consequently the token to prepare is not right !
+ \toks\count@=\expandafter{% augment the previous (right) token
+ \the\toks\count@
+ \itf@cellright
+ \itf@cellralign}%
+ \fi
+ \else % special column: do not change the token
+ \itf@cellrightfalse % the token to prepare cannot be right !
+ \fi
+ \advance \count@ \@ne \toks\count@{}% \prepnext@tok original def
+}% \itf@prepnext@tok
+\AfterPackage*{array}{%
+ \global\let\array@prepnext@tok\prepnext@tok % frozen original definition
+ \global\let\prepnext@tok\itf@prepnext@tok
+}% \AfterPackage*{array}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cellleft}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@celllalign}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cellright}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cellralign}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cellfont}
+% First initialisation to \cs{@empty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\itf@cellleft\@empty
+\let\itf@cellright\@empty
+\def\itf@celllalign{\itf@cellleft}% the row font spec. applies to pre-column material
+\let\itf@cellralign\@empty
+\let\itf@cellfont\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@l}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@c}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@j}
+% Setup macros to modify the alignment. The skips inserted to make the standard alignment
+% specified in the \textt{tabular} preamble are not the same with standard \xpackage{array} tabulars
+% and \xpackage{colortbl} tabulars, hence the switch \cs{ifitf@colortbl}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ifitf@colortbl\iffalse
+\AfterPackage*{colortbl}{\let\ifitf@colortbl\iftrue}
+\def\itf@cell@l{% force alignment to left
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \raggedright\arraybackslash
+ \itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@flush1\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\raggedright\arraybackslash}% local (noalign group)
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@l
+\def\itf@cell@c{% force alignment to center
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \centering\arraybackslash
+ \itf@flush{.5}\itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@flush{.5}\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\centering\arraybackslash}% local (noalign group)
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@c
+\def\itf@cell@r{% force alignment to right
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \raggedleft\arraybackslash
+ \itf@flush1\itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\raggedleft\arraybackslash}% local (noalign group)
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@r
+\def\itf@cell@j{% force justification (for p, m, b columns)
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@justify\itf@cellleft}%
+ \global\let\itf@cellralign\@empty
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\itf@justify}% local (noalign group)
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@j
+\def\itf@justify{%
+ \leftskip\z@skip \@rightskip\leftskip \rightskip\@rightskip
+ \parfillskip\@flushglue
+}% \itf@justify
+\AfterPackage*{ragged2e}{%
+\def\itf@cell@L{% force alignment to left (ragged2e)
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \RaggedRight\arraybackslash
+ \itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@flush1\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\RaggedRight\arraybackslash}%
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@L
+\def\itf@cell@C{% force alignment to center (ragged2e)
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \Centering\arraybackslash
+ \itf@flush{.5}\itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@flush{.5}\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\Centering\arraybackslash}%
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@C
+\def\itf@cell@R{% force alignment to right (ragged2e)
+ \gdef\itf@celllalign{\itf@removehfil
+ \RaggedLeft\arraybackslash
+ \itf@flush1\itf@cellleft}%
+ \gdef\itf@cellralign{\itf@ignorehfil}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\RaggedLeft\arraybackslash}%
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@R
+\def\itf@cell@J{% force justification (ragged2e)
+ \gdef\itf@celllallign{\justifying\arraybackslash\itf@cellleft}%
+ \global\let\itf@cellralign\@empty
+ \toks@\expandafter{\itf@cellleft\justifying\arraybackslash}%
+ \xdef\itf@cellleft{\the\toks@}%
+}% \itf@cell@J
+}% AfterPackage ragged2e
+\def\itf@flush#1{%
+ \ifitf@colortbl % colortbl uses \hfill rather than \hfil
+ \hskip \ifnum\currentgrouptype>13 \stretch{#1}%
+ \else\ifdim#1pt<1pt \itf@cellskip
+ \else \stretch{#1}
+ \fi\fi \relax
+ \else % array.sty
+ \ifnum \currentgrouptype>13\relax
+ \hfil \hskip1sp
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% \itf@flush
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@removehfil}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ignorehfil}
+% \cs{itf@removehfil} removes (eventually) the infinite stretchable glue inserted
+% \emph{before} the cell (in the preamble of \cs{halign}) to make the column alignment.
+%
+% \cs{itf@ignorehfil} removes (eventually) the infinite stretchable glue inserted
+% \emph{after} the cell (in the preamble of \cs{halign}) to make the column alignment.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\itf@cellskip
+\let\itf@hfil\hfil
+\let\itf@hfill\hfill
+\let\itf@hskip\hskip
+\def\itf@removehfil{%
+ \ifitf@colortbl
+ \unkern \itf@cellskip = \lastskip
+ \ifnum\gluestretchorder\itf@cellskip = \tw@ \hskip-\itf@cellskip
+ \else \itf@cellskip = \z@skip
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifdim\lastskip=1sp\unskip\fi
+ \ifnum\gluestretchorder\lastskip = \@ne
+ \hfilneg % \hfilneg for array.sty but not for colortbl...
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% \itf@removehfil
+\def\itf@nohfil{% \hfil -> do nothing + restore original \hfil
+ \def\hfil{\let\hfil\itf@hfil}% local to (alignment template) group
+}% \itf@nohfil
+\AfterPackage*{colortbl}{%
+ \def\itf@nohfil{%
+ \def\hfil{\let\hfil\itf@hfil}% local to (alignment template) group
+ \def\hfill{\let\hfill\itf@hfill}% (colortbl uses \hfill) pfff...
+ \def\hskip##1\relax{\let\hskip\itf@hskip}}% local
+}% AfterPackage colortbl
+\def\itf@ignorehfil{%
+ \aftergroup\itf@nohfil
+}% \itf@ignorehfil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</LaTeX>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[TikZ]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tikz>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-tikz}
+ [2010/09/21 v1.0 load of tikz libraries easily (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Catcode verifications}
+%
+% Some languages (french) changes the catcode of punctuations symbols: \textt: and \textt!
+% are active, and this is bad for tikz calculations.
+%
+% \cs{tikzset}\M*{every picture/.style={\cs{@makeother}...}} solves the problem.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Some catcode checking
+\AfterPackage*{tikz}{%
+ \AtEndPreamble{%
+ \tikzset{every picture/.add style={%
+ /utils/exec={\@makeother\!\@makeother\:}}{}}%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{List of pgf/TikZ packages and libraries}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alltikzpackages}
+% Record ``modules'' that must be loaded with \cs{usepackage}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\alltikzpackages{%
+ pgf,pgfmath,pgfcalendar,pgfplots,pgfpages,tikz%
+}% \alltikzpackages
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\allpgfmodules}
+% Record modules that must be loaded with \cs{usepgfmodule}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\allpgfmodules{matrix,plot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\alltikzlibraries}
+% Record modules that must be loaded with \cs{usetizlibrary}.
+%
+% If a module is a module is not found in any of the three lists \cs{alltikzpackage},\,
+% \cs{allpgfmodules},\, and\, \cs{alltikzlibraries}\, then \cs{usetikzlibrary} is used by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\alltikzlibraries{%
+ arrows,%
+ chains,%
+ er,%
+ scopes,%
+ snakes,%
+ shapes,%
+ shapes.misc,%
+ shapes.geometric,%
+ shapes.arrows,%
+ shapes.multipart,%
+ shapes.callouts,%
+ shapes.symbols,%
+ shapes.gates.logic.US,%
+ shapes.gates.logic.IEC,%
+ decorations,%
+ decorations.pathmorphing,%
+ decorations.pathreplacing,%
+ decorations.shapes,%
+ decorations.text,%
+ decorations.markings,%
+ decorations.fractals,%
+ decorations.footprints,%
+ positioning,trees,%
+ automata,%
+ patterns,%
+ fadings,%
+ shadows,%
+ through,%
+ backgrounds,%
+ petri,%
+ fit,%
+ mindmap,%
+ folding,%
+ plothandlers,%
+ plotmarks,%
+ calc,%
+ matrix%
+%% topath,placements,%
+}% \alltikzlibraries
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{pgfkeys definitions for \cs{usetikz}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tikz}{%
+ basic/.code={%
+ \usetikzlibrary{calc,%
+ arrows,% for arrows
+ backgrounds,% for framed
+ scopes% for scopes and shortcut : { [scope] ... }
+ }%
+ },%
+ basic/.value forbidden,% \alltikzpackages
+ base/.alias=basic,%
+ all/.code={%
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\alltikzpackages}%
+ \expandafter\usepgfmodule\expandafter{\allpgfmodules}% see pgfcorescopes.code.tex
+ \expandafter\usetikzlibrary\expandafter{\alltikzlibraries}% from: tikz.code.tex
+ },%
+ .unknown/.code=\itf@usetikzcode\pgfkeyscurrentname
+}% \pgfkeys for \usetikz
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\usetikz}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\usetikz[1]{%
+ \RequirePackage{tikz}%
+ \ifblank{#1}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/tikz}{all}}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/tikz}{#1}}%
+ \itf@pgfkeys% overwritten by \input primitive otherwise
+}% \usetikz
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@usetikzcode}
+%
+% For unknown keys: when a library is referenced.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@usetikzcode[1]{\begingroup
+ \edef\x{%
+ \noexpand\in@{,#1,}{,\alltikzpackages,}%
+ \noexpand\ifin@ \noexpand\usepackage{#1}%
+ \noexpand\else
+ \noexpand\in@{,#1,}{,\allpgfmodules,}%
+ \noexpand\ifin@ \noexpand\usepgfmodule{#1}%
+ \noexpand\else \noexpand\usetikzlibrary{#1}% \usetikzlibrary by default
+ \noexpand\fi
+ \noexpand\fi
+ }\expandafter\endgroup\x
+}% \itf@usetikzcode
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</tikz>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \sectionformat\subsection{bookmark/color=db}
+% \Subsection[titlesec]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*titlesec>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-titlesec}
+ [2010/10/20 v1.0 pgfkeys macros for titlesec (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\RequirePackage{auxhook}% for fix for \ttlp@append (odd/even pages, not implemented in interfaces)
+\itf@Check@Package{titlesec}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{titlesec modifications}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% t i t l e s e c "p a t c h e s"
+\robustify\titleclass \robustify\titleformat \robustify\titlespacing
+\AddLineBeginMainAux{%
+ \string\providecommand\string\ttlp@append[2]{}%
+}
+\BeforeFile*{ttlkeys.def}{%
+ \catcode32 9\relax % ignore spaces
+ \count@\endlinechar\endlinechar\m@ne % and line feeds
+}
+\AfterFile*{ttlkeys.def}{% restore spaces and line feeds
+ \catcode32 10\relax
+ \endlinechar\count@
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ttlh@runinifempty}
+%
+% A ``new'' shape which behaves like \texttbf{hang} but no paragraph break
+% is inserted if the title is empty. Hence the name: \textttbf{runinifempty}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% runinifempty => like hang but no paragraph break (like runin) if title is empty
+\def\ttlh@runinifempty{%
+ \csname ttlh@\ifx\ttl@savetitle\@empty runin\else hang\fi\endcsname
+}% \ttlh@runinifempty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{sectionformat}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionformat}
+% \cs{sectionformat}\cs{subsection}\stform*\M[shape]\M{key=value}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\sectionformat[1]{\@ifstar
+ {\itf@sectionformat{#1}{/*}}
+ {\itf@sectionformat{#1}{}}%
+}% \sectionformat
+\def\itf@sectionformat#1#2{\@testopt
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter%
+ \itf@sectionf@rmat\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\@nil{#2}}{}%
+}% \sectionformat
+\def\itf@sectionf@rmat#1\@nil#2[#3]#4{\itf@pgfkeys
+ \ifblank{#3}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1#2}
+ {/itf/titlesec/@setup={#1}{#2},#4,/itf/titlesec/@update={#1}{#2}}}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1#2}
+ {/itf/titlesec/@setup={#1}{#2},shape={#3},#4,/itf/titlesec/@update={#1}{#2}}}%
+}% \itf@ttl@sectionformat
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@setup}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@getformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@getspacing}
+% Macros used to retrieve the values set by \cs{titleformat} and/or \cs{titlespacing}. This allows
+% to use \cs{sectionformat} concurrently with \cs{titleformat} and \cs{titlespacing} provided by
+% \xpackage{titlesec}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% private keys @setup and @update
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec}{%
+ @setup/.code 2 args=\itf@ttl@setup{#1}{#2},%
+ @update/.code 2 args=\expandafter\itf@ttl@update
+ \csname#1\endcsname{/itf/titlesec/#1}{#2}%
+}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@ttl@setup[2]{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/titlesec/#1#2/shape}{}
+ {\itf@ttl@newsection{#1}{#2}}%
+ \ifcsundef{ttls@#1#2}{}% no previous spacing settings
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter%
+ \itf@ttl@getspacing\csname ttls@#1#2\endcsname{/itf/titlesec/#1#2}}%
+ \ifcsundef{ttlf@#1#2}{}% no previous format settings
+ {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter%
+ \itf@ttl@getformat\csname ttlf@#1#2\endcsname{/itf/titlesec/#1#2}}%
+}% \itf@ttl@setup
+\def\itf@ttl@setkey#1#2{\begingroup
+ \def\x{\pgfkeysvalueof{#1}}\def\y{#2}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\ifx\x\y\else
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{#1}{#2}\fi
+}% \itf@ttl@setkey
+\def\itf@ttl@getspacing#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#6/left}{#1}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#6/right}{#2}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#6/top}{#3}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#6/bottom}{#4}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#6/indent first}{#5}%
+}% \itf@ttl@getspacing
+\def\itf@ttl@getformat#1#2{%
+ \csname ltx@\ifx\pgfkeysvalueof#1first\else second\fi oftwo\endcsname
+ {\itf@ttl@get@format{}}
+ {\itf@ttl@get@format{#1}{#2}}%
+}% \itf@ttl@getformat
+\def\itf@ttl@get@format#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{%
+ \if\relax\detokenize{#1}\relax\else
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{#7/shape}{\expandafter\itf@strip@at\string#1}%
+ \fi
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#7/font}{#2}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#7/label}{#3}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#7/sep}{#4}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#7/before}{#5}%
+ \itf@ttl@setkey{#7/after}{#6}%
+}% \itf@ttl@get@format
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@update}
+% This macros plugs the values set before with \cs{pgfkeys} into the
+% special macros \cs{ttlf@\meta{section}} (for format) and \cs{ttls@\meta{section}} (for spacing).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@ttl@update[3]{%
+ \ifblank{#3}
+ {\ttl@getkeys{#1}{titlesec}}
+ {\ttl@getkeys{name=#1,numberless}{titlesec}}%
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{#2#3/shape}\itf@tp
+ \ifcsundef{ttlh@\itf@tp}
+ {\begingroup \makeatletter
+ \InputIfFileExists{\itf@tp.tss}{}{%
+ \PackageError{titlesec}{Unknown shape}%
+ {Shapes are defined in files with extension tss\MessageBreak
+ Either you have misspelled the shape\MessageBreak
+ or there is no a \itf@tp.tss file}}%
+ \endgroup}
+ {}%
+ \ifttl@explicit\@temptokena{\csdef{ttlf@\ttl@a}##1}%
+ \else\@temptokena{\csdef{ttlf@\ttl@a}}%
+ \fi
+ \the\@temptokena{%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/shape@cs}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/font}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/label}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/sep}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/before}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/after}}}%
+ \csname ttl@compat\ttl@a\endcsname
+ \ttl@spacing@ii
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/indent first}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/left}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/top}}%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/bottom}}%
+ [\pgfkeysvalueof{#2#3/right}]%
+}% \itf@ttl@update
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@titleclass}
+% This macro calls \cs{titleclass} to either:
+% \begin{itemize}[itemsep=0pt,topsep=0pt,parsep=0pt]
+% \item change the class of an existing sectionning command;
+% \interitem or:
+% \item create a new sectionning command.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% t i t l e c l a s s
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@ttl@titleclass{\@ifstar
+ {\itf@ttl@titleclass@i*}
+ {\itf@ttl@titleclass@i{}}%
+}% \itf@ttl@titleclass
+\def\itf@ttl@titleclass@i#1#2#3[#4]#5\@nil{\ifblank{#4}
+ {%
+ \expandafter\titleclass\csname#2\endcsname{#3}%
+ }
+ {%
+ \expandafter\titleclass\csname#2\endcsname{#3}[{#4}]% #4 = sup-level
+ \if\relax#1\relax % not starred
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter%
+ \itf@ttl@titleclass@ii\expandafter\@gobble\string#4\relax{#2}% subsection\relax{article} => \@addtoreset{article}{subsection}
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \expandafter\providecommand\csname l@#2\endcsname[2]{}% no entry in toc
+}% \itf@ttl@titleclass@i
+\def\itf@ttl@titleclass@ii#1\relax#2{%
+ \ifcsundef{c@#2}
+ {\newcounter{#2}[{#1}]}% creates counter for #1
+ {\@addtoreset{#2}{#1}}%
+ \csxdef{the#2}{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1\endcsname
+ .\noexpand\@arabic\expandafter\noexpand\csname c@#2\endcsname
+ }% \the#2
+ \ifcsundef{l@#1}{}{%
+ \expandafter\providecommand\csname l@#2\endcsname[2]{%
+ \csname l@#1\endcsname{##1}{##2}%
+ }% \l@#2 = \l@newsection is (by default) the same as \l@sup-level
+ }%
+}% \itf@ttl@titleclass@ii
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@createsection}
+% \qquad If \cs{sectionformat} is invoked with an unknown sectionning command (\ie an undefined macro
+% as first argument) then \cs{itf@ttl@createsection} is expanded in order to:
+% \begin{enumerate}[label=\arabic*),topsep=0pt]
+% \item create the new sectionning command with \cs{titleclass},
+% \item create the \xpackage{pgfkeys} keys for this section,
+% \item do some additionnal setup if \thispackage[interfaces-hypbmsec] and/or \thispackage[interfaces-tocloft] are loaded.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% C r e a t i n g n e w s e c t i o n s
+\def\itf@ttl@createsection#1{% sectionning command undefined: temporarily defined
+ \expandafter\titleclass\csname#1\endcsname{straight}[*]% in straight class
+ \itf@AfterPackage{hypbmsec}{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \csletcs{hbs@#1}{#1}%
+ \csxdef{#1}{\noexpand\hbs@do\expandafter\noexpand\csname hbs@#1\endcsname}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-tocloft}{%
+ \itf@cft@newsection{#1}{toc}%
+ }%
+ \itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-hypbmsec}{%
+ \cslet{last#1title}\@empty
+ \cslet{last#1bookmark}\@empty
+ \cslet{last#1toc}\@empty
+ }%
+}% \itf@ttl@createsection
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Keys for \cs{sectionformat}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@ttl@newsection}
+% This macro creates the \xpackage{pgfkeys} keys for each sectionning command.
+%
+% The \xpackage{pgfkeys} keys are not created at once, but only when \cs{sectionformat} is invoked first.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% D e f i n i n g k e y s f o r e a c h s e c t i o n
+\def\itf@ttl@newsection#1#2{% #1=section, #2=/* or empty
+ \ifcsundef{#1}% sectionning command undefined: temporarily defined in straight class
+ {\itf@ttl@createsection{#1}}
+ {}%
+ \ifblank{#2}{%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1}{% these keys do not exist for starred/numberless sections
+ class/.code=\itf@ttl@titleclass{#1}##1[]\@nil,% with \@addtoreset
+ class/.value required,% if sup-level is given
+ class*/.code=\itf@ttl@titleclass*{#1}##1[]\@nil,% without \@addtoreset
+ class*/.value required,% even if sup-level is given
+ shape/.initial=,% initial shapes set by titlesec.sty for not numbered sections.
+ the#1/.store in cs=the#1,%
+ the#1/.default=\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/titlesec/#1/label},%
+ }}
+ {% starred (numberless) unless titlesec, we do not put the default shape to hang,
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/titlesec/#1/shape}% but to the shape of the not starred
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/shape}\itf@tp}% sectionning command
+ {\def\itf@tp{hang}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1#2/shape}\itf@tp%
+ }%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1#2}{%
+ shape/.value required,%
+ shape@cs/.initial=\csname ttlh@\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/titlesec/#1#2/shape}\endcsname,% constant
+ shape@cs/.is private=interface-titlesec,% constant
+ font/.store as code,%
+ format/.alias*=font,%
+ label/.store as code,%
+ sep/.estore as glue,%
+ labelsep/.alias*=sep,%
+ before/.store as code,%
+ after/.store as code,%
+ indent first/.true=\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1#2/indent first}{\@ne},%
+ indent first/.false=\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1#2/indent first}{\z@},%
+ identfirst/.alias=indent first,%
+ indent first=true,%
+ left/.estore as glue,%
+ top/.estore as glue,%
+ bottom/.estore as glue,%
+ right/.estore as glue,%
+ break/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\cslet{#1break}\@empty}
+ {\protected\csdef{#1break}{##1}},%
+ break*/.code=\protected\apptocs{#1break}{##1},%
+ break+/.alias=break*,%
+ mark/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\cslet{#1mark}\@gobble}
+ {\protected\long\csdef{#1mark}####1{##1}},%
+ mark/.default=,%
+ }% \pgfkeys
+ \ifblank{#2}{% no default marks for stared (numberless) \section*
+ \itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-marks}{% requires interfaces-marks
+ \pgfkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1/mark/.default=\marksthe{#1}{##1}}%
+ }% AfterPackage interfaces-mark
+ \itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-bookmark}{% requires interfaces-bookmark
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/titlesec/#1}{% does not exist for starred sections
+ bookmark/.is multiple choice,%
+ bookmark/level/.estore in cs=toclevel@#1,% depth of the bookmark
+ bookmark/level/.default=,%
+ bookmark/level/.blank=\ifcsvoid{toclevel@#1}{99}{\csuse{toclevel@#1}},%
+ bookmark/toclevel/.alias=bookmark/level,%
+ bookmark/bold/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/bold}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/bold}{bold=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/bold/.default=true,%
+ bookmark/bold*/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/bold*}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/bold*}{bold*=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/bold*/.default=true,%
+ bookmark/italic/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/italic}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/italic}{italic=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/italic/.default=true,%
+ bookmark/italic*/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/italic*}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/italic}{italic*=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/italic*/.default=true,%
+ bookmark/color/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/color}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/color}{color=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/color/.default=,%
+ bookmark/color*/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/color*}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/color*}{color*=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/color*/.default=,%
+ bookmark/on/.code=\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/on}{disable=false,},%
+ bookmark/on/.value forbidden,%
+ bookmark/off/.code=\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/on}{disable=true,},%
+ bookmark/off/.value forbidden,%
+ bookmark/none/.alias=bookmark/off,%
+ bookmark/style/.code=\ifblank{##1}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/style}\@empty}
+ {\pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/style}{style=##1,}},%
+ bookmark/style/.default=,%
+ bookmark/.unknown/.code=\pgfkeysEsetvalue{/itf/titlesec/#1/bookmark/other}{\pgfkeyscurrentname={##1}},%
+ bookmark/bold/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/bold*/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/italic/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/italic*/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/color/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/color*/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/on/.initial=,%
+ bookmark/style/.initial=,%
+ }}% \AfterPackage*{interfaces-bookmark}
+ }% not starred (numberless) \section
+ {}% starred/numberless \section*: do not create the keys
+}% \itf@ttl@newsection
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline (patch)}
+% \patchlabel[prepend]{addcontentsline}
+% \qquad This modification of \cs{addcontentsline} occurs only if both \thispackage[interfaces-bookmark] \textbf{and}
+% \thispackage[interfaces-titlesec] are loaded. Implementation of the \textt[\pkgcolor]{bookmark} key and sub-keys
+% of \cs{sectionformat} for each sectionning command.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% bookmarks styles for sectionning commands:
+\@makeother\#
+\itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-bookmark}{%
+ \itf@patch\itf@preapptocmd\addcontentsline % #2=section name in
+ {\begingroup\itf@ttl@BKM{/itf/titlesec/#2/bookmark}}% \addcontentsline
+ {\endgroup}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-titlesec}
+ {Command \string\addcontentsline\space successfully patched!}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-titlesec}
+ {Patch of \string\addcontentsline\space failed
+ \MessageBreak bookmark-style specs for sections
+ \MessageBreak will be unavailable}}%
+}% AfterPackage interfaces-bookmark
+\catcode`\#=6
+\def\itf@ttl@BKM#1{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{#1/.@cmd}
+ {%
+ \edef\itf@tp{% do nothing if the keys are not set (shortcut)
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/bold}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/bold*}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/italic}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/italic*}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/color}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/color*}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/on}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{#1/style}}%
+ \ifx\itf@tp\@empty
+ \else
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{#1/bold*}\@empty
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{#1/italic*}\@empty
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{#1/color*}\@empty
+ \expandafter\bookmarksetup\expandafter{\itf@tp}%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/*}%
+ {% \bookmarksetup{color*=} overwrites \sectionformat...{bookmark/color*=}
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/bookmark/*}\itf@tp
+ \expandafter\bookmarksetup\expandafter{\itf@tp}%
+ }
+ {}%
+ \fi}
+ {}%
+}% \itf@ttl@BKM
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{bottomtitles}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bottomtitles}
+% This is a ``skip command'': it can be assigned a number or a skip.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% b o t t o m t i t l e s
+\newrobustcmd*\bottomtitles{\@ifnextchar\bgroup
+ \itf@setbottomtitlespace
+ {\afterassignment\itf@set@bottomtitle@space\itf@sk}%
+}% \bottomtitles
+\def\itf@setbottomtitlespace#1{%
+ \@defaultunits\itf@sk#1\textheight\relax\@nnil
+ \itf@set@bottomtitle@space
+}% \itf@setbottomtitlespace
+\def\itf@set@bottomtitle@space{\edef\bottomtitlespace{\the\itf@sk}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</titlesec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[hyperref]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hyperref>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-hyperref}
+ [2010/08/08 v1.0 provides raised hyperdef (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{hyperref}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\raisedhyperdef}
+%
+% The anchor is made with \cs{Hy@raisedlink}. The raised amount is used in \cs{HyperRaiseLinkHook}:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd\raisedhyperdef[4][]{\begingroup
+ \ifblank{#1}
+ {}
+ {%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\HyperRaiseLinkHook\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\HyperRaiseLinkHook
+ \expandafter{\HyperRaiseLinkHook}% restore current definition
+ \HyperRaiseLinkHook
+ \advance\noexpand\HyperRaiseLinkLength by\dimexpr#1\relax\relax}%
+ }%
+ \ifx \\#2\\\def \Hy@AnchorName {#3}\else
+ \def \Hy@AnchorName {#2.#3}%
+ \fi
+ \ltx@leavevmode
+ \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\Hy@AnchorName}\hyper@anchorend}%
+ \endgroup
+ #4%
+}% \raisedhyperdef
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</hyperref>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[bookmark]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bookmark>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-bookmark}
+ [2010/09/08 v1.0 more control on bookmarks (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-hyperref}
+\RequirePackage{refcount}
+\itf@Check@Package{bookmark}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \patchlabel[modif]{bookmark}
+% \begin{macro}{\\bookmark (patch)}
+% Implementation of \textt[\opt]{disable},\, and\, starred keys \stform*
+% (previous values must be restored after \cs{write}):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\itf@patch\expandafter\patchcmd\csname\string\bookmark\endcsname
+ {\immediate\write\@mainaux}{\itf@BKM@write}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-bookmark}
+ {Command \expandafter\string\csname\string\bookmark\endcsname\space
+ successfully patched!}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-bookmark}
+ {Command \expandafter\string\csname\string\bookmark\endcsname\space
+ could not be patched\MessageBreak
+ Loading of interfaces-bookmark is canceled}%
+ \endinput}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{star keys\stform* definitions}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\itf@BKM@enable\@ne % 0 = disable*, 1=enable, \@M = disable
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark}{%
+ disable/.true=\global\let\itf@BKM@enable\@M,%
+ disable/.false=\global\let\itf@BKM@enable\@ne,%
+ disable*/.true=\global\let\itf@BKM@enable\z@,%
+ disable*/.false=\global\let\itf@BKM@enable\@ne,%
+ atend/.true=\ifnum\itf@BKM@enable>0\edef\itf@BKM@enable{\number-\itf@BKM@enable}\fi,%
+ atend/.false=\ifnum\itf@BKM@enable<0\edef\itf@BKM@enable{\number-\itf@BKM@enable}\fi,%
+ bold*/.true=\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark}{@save={bold=true}},%
+ bold*/.false=\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark}{@save={bold=false}},%
+ bold*/@blank/.code=\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{bold},%
+ bold*/.blank=@blank,%
+ italic*/.true=\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark}{@save={italic=true}},%
+ italic*/.false=\pgfkeys{/itf/bookmark}{@save={italic=false}},%
+ italic*/@blank/.code=\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{italic},%
+ italic*/.blank=@blank,%
+ color*/.code={\ifblank{#1}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{color}}
+ {\pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark}{@save={color={#1}}}}%
+ },%
+ @save/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}{}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}\BKM@color}%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}{}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}\BS@BKM@FontStyle}%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}{}
+ {\pgfkeysEsetvalue{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}{\the\currentgrouplevel}}%
+ \pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/bookmark/*}{}{,#1}%
+ \bookmarksetup{#1}%
+ },%
+ @restore/color/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}\BKM@color}
+ {},%
+ @restore/FontStyle/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}\BS@BKM@FontStyle}
+ {},%
+ @restore/.code={%
+%% \pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{color,FontStyle}% repeating the following lines
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}% is quicker than setting a /.style ...
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}\BKM@color}
+ {}%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}\BS@BKM@FontStyle}
+ {}%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}
+ {% shortcut: \bookmarksetup{bold*} called inside main group (level 0)
+ \ifnum\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}=\z@
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}\@undefined
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}\@undefined
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}\@undefined
+ \global\pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/*}\@undefined
+ \global\let\BKM@color\BKM@color
+ \global\let\BS@BKM@FontStyle\BS@BKM@FontStyle
+ \else % restore after each group as needed
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/FontStyle}\@undefined
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/color}\@undefined
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/*}\@undefined
+ \ifnum\currentgrouplevel>\z@
+ \aftergroup\itf@BKM@restore
+ \else
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}\@undefined
+ \fi\fi
+ }
+ {}%
+ },%
+ @restore/bold/.code={% bold is "hidden" in \BS@BKM@FontStyle
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\itf@tp{\bookmarkget{bold}}%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{FontStyle}%
+ \count@=\bookmarkget{bold}%
+ \edef\itf@tp{\endgroup
+ \ifnum\itf@tp=\count@
+ \else \noexpand\bookmarksetup{%
+ bold\ifcase\count@ =false\fi}\fi
+ }\itf@tp},%
+ @restore/italic/.code={% italic is "hidden" in \BS@BKM@FontStyle
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\itf@tp{\bookmarkget{italic}}%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/bookmark/@restore}{FontStyle}%
+ \count@=\bookmarkget{italic}%
+ \edef\itf@tp{\endgroup
+ \ifnum\itf@tp=\count@
+ \else \noexpand\bookmarksetup{%
+ italic\ifcase\count@ =false\fi}\fi
+ }\itf@tp},%
+}
+\def\itf@BKM@restore{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/bookmark/@save/grouplevel}
+ {\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/@restore}}
+ {}%
+}% \itf@BKM@restore
+%% Plug the BKM keys in the interfaces pgfkeys (not efficient but quickly written...)
+\define@key{BKM}{disable}[true]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/disable={#1}}}
+\define@key{BKM}{disable*}[true]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/disable*={#1}}}
+\define@key{BKM}{bold*}[true]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/bold*={#1}}}
+\define@key{BKM}{italic*}[true]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/italic*={#1}}}
+\define@key{BKM}{color*}[]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/color*={#1}}}
+\define@key{BKM}{atend}[true]{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfkeysalso{/itf/bookmark/atend={#1}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@BKM@write}
+% \begin{enumerate}[label=\arabic*),topsep=0pt,parsep=0pt,itemsep=0pt]
+% \item check if the bookmark is disable
+% \item restore previous values in case starred\stform* keys have been set.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@BKM@write#1{%
+ \aftergroup\itf@BKM@restore
+ \ifcase\itf@BKM@enable
+ \global\let\itf@BKM@enable\@ne
+ \or
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{#1}%
+ \else
+ \ifcase -\itf@BKM@enable % (case -0 = 0 tested before)
+ \or % (case -1 = enable but At End)
+ \let\itf@BKM@enable\@ne
+ \edef\itf@tp{\immediate\write\@mainaux{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\BookmarkAtEnd\expandafter{\itf@tp}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}% \itf@BKM@write
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\texttt{ref} and \texttt{pageref} keys}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@BKM@pageref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% pageref= key for \bookmark (using refcount : \getpagerefnumber)
+\def\itf@BKM@pageref[#1]{%
+ \expandafter\itf@BKM@@pageref
+ \csname r@#1\endcsname{#1}%
+}% \itf@BKM@pageref
+\def\itf@BKM@@pageref#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Hyper reference `#2' on page \thepage \space undefined
+ \MessageBreak for bookmark destination page
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \edef\BKM@page{\getrefbykeydefault{#2}{page}{1}}%
+}% \itf@BKM@@pageref
+\define@key{BKM}{pageref}{%
+ \Hy@babelnormalise\itf@BKM@pageref[{#1}]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@BKM@ref}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% ref= key for \bookmark
+\def\itf@BKM@ref[#1]{%
+ \expandafter\itf@BKM@@ref
+ \csname r@#1\endcsname{#1}%
+}% \itf@BKM@ref
+\def\itf@BKM@@ref#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \protect\G@refundefinedtrue
+ \@latex@warning{%
+ Hyper reference `#2' on page \thepage \space undefined
+ \MessageBreak for bookmark destination
+ }%
+ \def\BKM@dest{??}%
+ \else
+ \edef\BKM@dest{\expandafter\@fourthoffive#1\@empty\@empty}%
+ \fi
+}% \BKM@@ref
+\define@key{BKM}{ref}{%
+ \Hy@babelnormalise\itf@BKM@ref[{#1}]}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</bookmark>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[hypbmsec]
+%
+% \subsubsection{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hypbmsec>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ [2010/10/05 v1.0 lastsection etc. (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{hypbmsec}
+\AfterPackage*{interfaces-titlesec}{% requires interface-titlesec
+ \input{interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex}%
+}%
+%</hypbmsec>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hypbmsec.code.tex>
+\ProvidesFile{hypbmsec.code.tex}
+ [2010/10/05 v1.0 code for interfaces-hypbmsec (FC)]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbs@do (patch)}
+% \patchlabel[prepend]{hbs@do}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\hbs@do{%
+ \edef\itf@tp{\expandafter\itf@strip@at\string#1}%
+ }%
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\hbs@do\space successfully patched}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\hbs@do\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak loading of `interfaces-hypbmsec` aborted
+ \MessageBreak \string\lastsection\space will not work}%
+ \endinput}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hbs@process (patch)}
+% \patchlabel[prepend]{hbs@process}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\hbs@process{%
+ \itf@hbs@next{#1}%
+ }%
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\hbs@process\space successfully patched}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\hbs@process\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak loading of `interfaces-hypbmsec` aborted
+ \MessageBreak \string\lastsection\space will not work}%
+ \endinput}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@hbs@next}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\itf@hbs@next#1{%
+ \csdef{itf@next\itf@tp title}{#1}%
+ \ifx\hbs@tocstring\relax
+ \csletcs{itf@next\itf@tp toc}{itf@next\itf@tp}%
+ \else
+ \cslet{itf@next\itf@tp toc}\hbs@tocstring
+ \fi
+ \ifx\hbs@bmstring\relax
+ \csletcs{itf@next\itf@tp bookmark}{itf@next\itf@tp toc}%
+ \else
+ \cslet{itf@next\itf@tp bookmark}\hbs@bmstring
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\itf@hbs@chkclass
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\string
+ \expandafter\hbs@seccmd\string\ttl@\@nil
+ {}
+ {\expandafter\itf@last@from@next\expandafter{\itf@tp}}%
+}% \itf@hbs@next
+\edef\itf@tp{%
+ \long\def\noexpand\itf@hbs@chkclass##1\string\ttl@##2\noexpand\@nil{%
+ \noexpand\ifblank{##1}%
+ }% \itf@hbs@chkclass
+}\itf@tp
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ttl@select (patch)}
+% \patchlabel[prepend]{ttl@select}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\ttl@select{%
+ \itf@last@from@next{#1}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\ttl@select\space successfully patched}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-hypbmsec}
+ {Command \string\ttl@select\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak loading of `interfaces-hypbmsec` aborted
+ \MessageBreak \string\lastsection\space will not work}%
+ \endinput}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@last@from@next}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@last@from@next#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname last#1title\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname itf@next#1title\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname itf@last#1toc\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname itf@next#1toc\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname last#1bookmark\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname itf@next#1bookmark\endcsname
+ \expandafter\def\csname lastsectionname\endcsname{#1}%
+}% \itf@last@from@next
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% \lastsection reinitialization (at \stepcounter-> \cl@section)
+\def\itf@hbs@resetlast#1{%
+ \ifcsname last#1\endcsname
+ \global\expandafter\let
+ \csname last#1\endcsname\@empty
+ \fi
+}% \itf@hbs@resetlast
+\def\itf@hbs@reset#1{%
+ \itf@hbs@resetlast{#1title}%
+ \itf@hbs@resetlast{#1bookmark}%
+ \itf@hbs@resetlast{#1toc}%
+ \csuse{cl@#1}%
+}% \itf@hbs@reset
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ltx@stpelt\@stpelt
+\def\itf@hbs@stpelt#1{%
+ \let\@elt\itf@hbs@reset
+ \@elt{#1}%
+ \let\@elt\itf@stpelt
+}% \itf@hbs@stpelt
+\def\itf@stpelt#1{%
+ \ltx@stpelt{#1}%
+ \itf@hbs@stpelt{#1}%
+}% \itf@stpelt
+\let\@stpelt\itf@stpelt
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@for\itf@tp:=part,section,subsection,subsubsection,paragraph,subparagraph%
+ \do{\global\expandafter\let\csname last\itf@tp title\endcsname\@empty
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname last\itf@tp toc\endcsname\@empty
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname last\itf@tp bookmark\endcsname\@empty}%
+\AtBeginDocument{\ifundef\chapter{}
+ {\global\let\lastchaptertitle\@empty
+ \global\let\lastchaptertoc\@empty
+ \global\let\lastchapterbookmark\@empty}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</hypbmsec.code.tex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[fancyhdr]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fancyhdr>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-fancyhdr}
+ [2010/07/22 v1.0 pgfkeys macros for fancyhdr (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{fancyhdr}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+\robustify\fancyhf
+\robustify\fancyhfoffset
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{pagesetup}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagesetup}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\pagesetup{%
+ \let\fancy@gbl\relax % Just in case...
+ \@ifstar
+ {\itf@pagesetup{}}
+ {\itf@pagesetup{reset,}}%
+}% \pagesetup
+\def\itf@pagesetup#1{\@testopt
+ {\itf@p@gesetup{#1}}{}%
+}% \itf@pagesetup
+\def\itf@p@gesetup#1[#2]#3{\ifblank{#2}
+ {% modifies the current page style
+ \itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/fancyhdr}{#1#3}\relax\ps@@fancy}%
+ {% defines or modifies a given page style
+ \ifblank{#1}
+ \csappto% star form: keep existing value (if not overwritten)
+ \csdef% no star form: overwrite (+ reset at \pagestyle time)
+ {ps@#2}{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/fancyhdr}{#1#3}\relax\ps@@fancy}%
+ }%
+}% \itf@p@gesetup
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/pagesetup}{%
+ @current/.is private=interfaces-fancyhdr,%
+ @style/.is private=interfaces-fancyhdr,%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\pagestyle[1]{\ifcsundef{ps@#1}
+ {\itf@undefinedpagestyle{#1}}
+ {\csname ps@#1\endcsname}%
+}% \pagestyle
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\thispagestyle[1]{\ifcsundef{ps@#1}
+ {\itf@undefinedpagestyle{#1}}
+ {\global\@specialpagetrue\gdef\@specialstyle{#1}}%
+}% \thispagestyle
+\newcommand*\itf@undefinedpagestyle[1]{%
+ \@latex@error{Undefined page style: #1
+ \MessageBreak your command will be ignored}\@eha
+}% \itf@undefinedpagestyle
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Keys for \cs{pagesetup}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.fancy@hf/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.store as code=}%
+ \csedef{f@ncy#1}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/font}
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\strut},%
+}% handler for fancyhdr interface
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/fancyhdr}{% keys for \pagesetup
+ code/.code={#1},% execution at expansion of \ps@... => \pgfqkeys{...,code={...},...}
+ pagestyle/.style={code=\pagestyle{#1}},%
+ page style/.alias=pagestyle,%
+ load style/.alias=pagestyle,%
+ head/rule/.store as dimen in cs=headrulewidth,%
+ head/rule/.default=.4pt,%
+ head/rule/.blank=\z@,%
+ head/rulewidth/.alias*=head/rule,%
+ headrulewidth/.alias*=head/rule,%
+ head/rule/width/.alias*=head/rule,%
+ head/rule/font/.store as code,%
+ head/rule/color/.style={head/rule/font+=\color{#1}},%
+ headruler/.code=%
+ \let\headrule\pgfkeyscurrentvalue
+ \ifx\headrule\@empty\else
+ \preto\headrule{\bgroup\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/fancyhdr/head/rule/font}}%
+ \appto\headrule{\egroup}%
+ \fi,%
+ headruler/.default=%
+ \if@fancyplain\let\headrulewidth\plainheadrulewidth\fi
+ \hrule\@height\headrulewidth \@width\headwidth
+ \vskip-\headrulewidth\relax,%
+ headrule/.alias=headruler,%
+ headrule,% sets default
+ foot/rule/.store as dimen in cs=footrulewidth,%
+ foot/rule/.default=.4pt,%
+ foot/rule/.blank=\z@,%
+ foot/rulewidth/.alias*=foot/rule,%
+ footrulewidth/.alias*=foot/rule,%
+ foot/rule/width/.alias*=foot/rule,%
+ foot/rule/font/.store as code,%
+ foot/rule/color/.style={foot/rule/font+=\color{#1}},%
+ footruler/.code=%
+ \let\footrule\pgfkeyscurrentvalue
+ \ifx\footrule\@empty\else
+ \preto\footrule{\bgroup\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/fancyhdr/head/rule/font}}%
+ \appto\footrule{\egroup}
+ \fi,%
+ footruler/.default=%
+ \if@fancyplain\let\footrulewidth\plainfootrulewidth\fi
+ \vskip-2\footrulewidth
+ \hrule\@height\footrulewidth \@width\headwidth\vskip\footrulewidth,%
+ footrule/.alias=footruler,%
+ footrule,% sets default
+ rule/.style={head/rule={#1},foot/rule={#1}},%
+ rule+/.style={head/rule+={#1},foot/rule+={#1}},%
+ rule-/.style={head/rule-={#1},foot/rule-={#1}},%
+ rule*/.style={head/rule*={#1},foot/rule*={#1}},%
+ rules/.alias*=rule,rulewidth/.alias*=rule,%
+ rule/width/.alias*=rule,rules/width/.alias*=rule,%
+ norule/.style={rule=\z@},%
+ norule/.value forbidden,%
+ norules/.alias=norule,%
+ rule/font/.style={head/rule/font={#1},foot/rule/font={#1}},%
+ rule/font+/.style={head/rule/font+={#1},foot/rule/font+={#1}},%
+ rule/font*/.alias=rule/font+,%
+ rule/color/.style={head/rule/color={#1},foot/rule/color={#1}},%
+ foot/rule/skip/.store as glue in cs=footruleskip,%
+ foot/rule/skip/.default=.3\normalbaselineskip,%
+ foot/rule/skip/.blank=\z@,%
+ foot/ruleskip/.alias*=foot/rule/skip,% => puis les alias&style: /.alias 2 args=/foot/rule/skip{/subkey1,/subkey2,/sub/key3,/sub/key4,...}
+ footruleskip/.alias*=foot/rule/skip,% crée aussi les alias pour les sous clés
+ font/.style={head/font={#1},foot/font={#1}},%
+ head/.style={head/left={#1},head/center={#1},head/right={#1}},%
+ head/font/.style={head/left/font={#1},head/center/font={#1},head/right/font={#1}},%
+ head/font+/.style={head/left/font+={#1},head/center/font+={#1},head/right/font+={#1}},%
+ nohead/.style={head=,head/font=,head/rule=},
+ foot/.style={foot/left={#1},foot/center={#1},foot/right={#1}},%
+ foot/font/.style={foot/left/font={#1},foot/center/font={#1},foot/right/font={#1}},%
+ foot/font+/.style={foot/left/font+={#1},foot/center/font+={#1},foot/right/font+={#1}},%
+ nofoot/.style={foot=,foot/font=,foot/rule=},
+ left/.style={head/left={#1},foot/left={#1}},%
+ left/font/.style={head/left/font={#1},foot/left/font={#1}},%
+ left/font+/.style={head/left/font+={#1},foot/left/font+={#1}},%
+ center/.style={head/center={#1},foot/center={#1}},%
+ center/font/.style={head/center/font={#1},foot/center/font={#1}},%
+ center/font+/.style={head/center/font+={#1},foot/center/font+={#1}},%
+ right/.style={head/right={#1},foot/right={#1}},%
+ right/font/.style={head/right/font={#1},foot/right/font={#1}},%
+ right/font+/.style={head/right/font+={#1},foot/right/font+={#1}},%
+ head/left/.style={head/left/even={#1},head/left/odd={#1}},%
+ head/left/font/.style={head/left/even/font={#1},head/left/odd/font={#1}},%
+ head/left/font+/.style={head/left/even/font+={#1},head/left/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ head/center/.style={head/center/even={#1},head/center/odd={#1}},%
+ head/center/font/.style={head/center/even/font={#1},head/center/odd/font={#1}},%
+ head/center/font+/.style={head/center/even/font+={#1},head/center/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ head/right/.style={head/right/even={#1},head/right/odd={#1}},%
+ head/right/font/.style={head/right/even/font={#1},head/right/odd/font={#1}},%
+ head/right/font+/.style={head/right/even/font+={#1},head/right/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ foot/left/.style={foot/left/even={#1},foot/left/odd={#1}},%
+ foot/left/font/.style={foot/left/even/font={#1},foot/left/odd/font={#1}},%
+ foot/left/font+/.style={foot/left/even/font+={#1},foot/left/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ foot/center/.style={foot/center/even={#1},foot/center/odd={#1}},%
+ foot/center/font/.style={foot/center/even/font={#1},foot/center/odd/font={#1}},%
+ foot/center/font+/.style={foot/center/even/font+={#1},foot/center/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ foot/right/.style={foot/right/even={#1},foot/right/odd={#1}},%
+ foot/right/font/.style={foot/right/even/font={#1},foot/right/odd/font={#1}},%
+ foot/right/font+/.style={foot/right/even/font+={#1},foot/right/odd/font+={#1}},%
+ head/left/odd/.fancy@hf=olh,%
+ head/left/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/head/left/.alias=head/left/odd,%
+ odd/head/left/font/.alias*=head/left/odd/font,%
+ head/odd/left/.alias=head/left/odd,%
+ head/odd/left/font/.alias*=head/left/odd/font,%
+ head/center/odd/.fancy@hf=och,%
+ head/center/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/head/center/.alias=head/center/odd,%
+ odd/head/center/font/.alias*=head/center/odd/font,%
+ head/odd/center/.alias=head/center/odd,%
+ head/odd/center/font/.alias*=head/center/odd/font,%
+ head/right/odd/.fancy@hf=orh,%
+ head/right/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/head/right/.alias=head/right/odd,%
+ odd/head/right/font/.alias*=head/right/odd/font,%
+ head/odd/right/.alias=head/right/odd,%
+ head/odd/right/font/.alias*=head/right/odd/font,%
+ head/left/even/.fancy@hf=elh,%
+ head/left/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/head/left/.alias=head/left/even,%
+ even/head/left/font/.alias*=head/left/even/font,%
+ head/even/left/.alias=head/left/even,%
+ head/even/left/font/.alias*=head/left/even/font,%
+ head/center/even/.fancy@hf=ech,%
+ head/center/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/head/center/.alias=head/center/even,%
+ even/head/center/font/.alias*=head/center/even/font,%
+ head/even/center/.alias=head/center/even,%
+ head/even/center/font/.alias*=head/center/even/font,%
+ head/right/even/.fancy@hf=erh,%
+ head/right/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/head/right/.alias=head/right/even,%
+ even/head/right/font/.alias*=head/right/even/font,%
+ head/even/right/.alias=head/right/even,%
+ even/head/right/font/.alias*=head/right/even/font,%
+ foot/left/odd/.fancy@hf=olf,%
+ foot/left/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/foot/left/.alias=foot/left/odd,%
+ odd/foot/left/font/.alias*=foot/left/odd/font,%
+ foot/odd/left/.alias=foot/left/odd,%
+ foot/odd/left/font/.alias*=foot/left/odd/font,%
+ foot/center/odd/.fancy@hf=ocf,%
+ foot/center/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/foot/center/.alias=foot/center/odd,%
+ odd/foot/center/font/.alias*=foot/center/odd/font,%
+ foot/odd/center/.alias=foot/center/odd,%
+ foot/odd/center/font/.alias*=foot/center/odd/font,%
+ foot/right/odd/.fancy@hf=orf,%
+ foot/right/odd/font/.store as code=+,%
+ odd/foot/right/.alias=foot/right/odd,%
+ odd/foot/right/font/.alias*=foot/right/odd/font,%
+ odd/foot/right/.alias=foot/right/odd,%
+ odd/foot/right/font/.alias*=foot/right/odd/font,%
+ foot/left/even/.fancy@hf=elf,%
+ foot/left/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/foot/left/.alias=foot/left/even,%
+ even/foot/left/font/.alias*=foot/left/even/font,%
+ foot/even/left/.alias=foot/left/even,%
+ foot/even/left/font/.alias*=foot/left/even/font,%
+ foot/center/even/.fancy@hf=ecf,%
+ foot/center/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/foot/center/.alias=foot/center/even,%
+ even/foot/center/font/.alias*=foot/center/even/font,%
+ foot/even/center/.alias=foot/center/even,%
+ foot/even/center/font/.alias*=foot/center/even/font,%
+ foot/right/even/.fancy@hf=erf,%
+ foot/right/even/font/.store as code=+,%
+ even/foot/right/.alias=foot/right/even,%
+ even/foot/right/font/.alias*=foot/right/even/font,%
+ foot/even/right/.alias=foot/right/even,%
+ foot/even/right/font/.alias*=foot/right/even/font,%
+ offset/.style={head/offset={#1},foot/offset={#1}},%
+ head/offset/.style={head/left/offset={#1},head/right/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/head/.alias=head/offset,%
+ foot/offset/.style={foot/left/offset={#1},foot/right/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/foot/.alias=foot/offset,%
+ head/left/offset/.style={head/left/even/offset={#1},head/left/odd/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/head/left/.alias=head/left/offset,%
+ head/right/offset/.style={head/right/even/offset={#1},head/right/odd/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/head/right/.alias=head/right/offset,%
+ foot/left/offset/.style={foot/left/even/offset={#1},foot/left/odd/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/foot/left/.alias=foot/left/offset,%
+ foot/right/offset/.style={foot/right/even/offset={#1},foot/right/odd/offset={#1}},%
+ offset/foot/right/.alias=foot/right/offset,%
+ head/left/even/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@elh,%
+ offset/head/left/even/.alias=head/left/even/offset,%
+ head/left/odd/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@olh,%
+ offset/head/left/odd/.alias=head/left/odd/offset,%
+ head/right/even/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@erh,%
+ offset/head/right/even/.alias=head/right/even/offset,%
+ head/right/odd/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@orh,%
+ offset/head/right/odd/.alias=head/right/odd/offset,%
+ foot/left/even/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@elf,%
+ offset/foot/left/even/.alias=foot/left/even/offset,%
+ foot/left/odd/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@olf,%
+ offset/foot/left/odd/.alias=foot/left/odd/offset,%
+ foot/right/even/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@erf,%
+ offset/foot/right/even/.alias=foot/right/even/offset,%
+ foot/right/odd/offset/.store in skip cs=f@ncyO@orf,%
+ offset/foot/right/odd/.alias=foot/right/odd/offset,%
+ reset/.style={norule,head=,foot=,offset=\z@,foot/rule/skip,rule/font=,font=},%
+ reset/.value forbidden,%
+}% keys for \pagesetup (stored into token \itf@tk)
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifdim\headwidth<\z@
+%% This catches the case that \headwidth hasn't been initialized and the
+%% case that the user added something to \headwidth in the expectation that
+%% it was initialized to \textwidth. We compensate this now. This loses if
+%% the user intended to multiply it by a factor. But that case is more
+%% likely done by saying something like \headwidth=1.2\textwidth.
+%% The doc says you have to change \headwidth after the first call to
+%% \pagestyle{fancy}. This code is just to catch the most common cases were
+%% that requirement is violated.
+ \global\advance\headwidth123456789sp\global\advance\headwidth\textwidth
+\fi}
+%</fancyhdr>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{marks}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*marks>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-marks}
+ [2010/10/12 v1.0 easier use of e-TeX marks (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksthe}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd\marksthe[2]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#1\endcsname\else
+ \itf@marks@new{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\marks\csname marks@#1\endcsname{\unexpanded{#2}}%
+}% \marksthe
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\marksthecs}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\marksthecs[2]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#1\endcsname\else
+ \itf@marks@new{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\marks\csname marks@#1\endcsname{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \csname#2\endcsname}}%
+}% \marksthecs
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@marks@new}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@marks@new#1{%
+ \expandafter\newmarks\csname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \PackageInfo{interfaces-marks}
+ {New marks `#1' defined}
+}% \itf@marks@warning
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thefirstmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\thebotmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\thetopmarks}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\thefirstmarks[1]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\firstmarks\csname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}% \thefirstmarks
+\newcommand*\thebotmarks[1]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\botmarks\csname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}% \thebotmarks
+\newcommand*\thetopmarks[1]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\topmarks\csname marks@#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}% \thetopmarks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getthemarks}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \getthemarks\firstmarks{section}\macro
+\newrobustcmd*\getthemarks[3]{%
+ \ifcsname marks@#2\endcsname
+ \expandafter\itf@getthemarks\expandafter#1\csname marks@#2\endcsname{#3}%
+ \else \let#3\@undefined
+ \fi
+}% \getthemarks
+\def\itf@getthemarks#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#3\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}% \itf@getthemarks
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\getthefirstmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\getthebotmarks}
+% \begin{macro}{\getthetopmarks}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\getthefirstmarks[2]{\getthemarks\firstmarks{#1}{#2}}
+\newrobustcmd*\getthebotmarks[2]{\getthemarks\botmarks{#1}{#2}}
+\newrobustcmd*\getthetopmarks[2]{\getthemarks\topmarks{#1}{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmarksequal}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% \ifmarksequal\firstmarks\botmarks{subsection}{ true }{ false }
+\newrobustcmd*\ifmarksequal[3]{%
+ \begingroup
+ \getthemarks{#1}{#3}\@tempa
+ \getthemarks{#2}{#3}\@tempb
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \csname ltx@\ifdefined\@tempa\ifdefined\@tempb
+ \ifx\@tempa\@tempb first\else
+ second\fi\else
+ second\fi\else
+ second\fi
+ oftwo\endcsname
+}% \ifmarksequal
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</marks>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[tocloft]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*tocloft>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-tocloft}
+ [2010/07/23 v1.0 pgfkeys macros for tocloft (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{tocloft}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tocsetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\lofsetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\lotsetup}
+% \begin{macro}{\listofsetup}
+%
+% The user commands.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd\tocsetup[1]{%
+ \AfterPreamble{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/toc}{#1}}%
+}% \tocsetup
+\newrobustcmd\lofsetup[1]{%
+ \AfterPreamble{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/lof}{#1}}%
+}% \lofsetup
+\newrobustcmd\lotsetup[1]{%
+ \AfterPreamble{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/lot}{#1}}%
+}% \lotsetup
+\newrobustcmd\listofsetup[2]{%
+ \AfterPreamble{\itf@pgfkeys\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/#1}{#2}}%
+}% \listofsetup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cft@newlistof}
+%
+% This macro creates the keys for \textt{toc}, \textt{lof} and \textt{lot}, and is able
+% to create the keys for each new list created with \xpackage{tocloft}'s \cs{newlistof}.
+
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cft@newlistof#1{%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/#1}{%
+ pagestyle/.code=\tocloftpagestyle{##1},%
+ parskip/.store in skip cs=cftparskip,%
+ parsep/.alias=parskip,%
+ mark/.store in cs=cftmark#1,%
+ marks/.alias=mark,%
+ label/.store as code,%
+ ref/.store as code,%
+ ref/.initial=\csname cft#1title\endcsname,% overwritten (toc,lof,lot)
+ ref/.default=\csname cft#1title\endcsname,% overwritten (toc,lof,lot)
+ ref/.blank=\pgfkeysnovalue,%
+ title/.store as code in cs=cft#1title,% overwritten below for toc, lof and lot
+ title/top/.store in skip cs=cftbefore#1titleskip,%
+ beforetitleskip/.alias*=title/top,%
+ title/bottom/.store in skip cs=cftafter#1titleskip,%
+ aftertitleskip/.alias*=title/bottom,%
+ title/font/.store as code in cs=cft#1titlefont,%
+ title/format/.alias*=title/font,%
+ title/after/.store as code in cs=cftafter#1title,%
+ dotsep/.code=\itf@units@mu\itf@musk{##1}% converts to mu
+ \edef\cftdotsep{\itf@strip@mu\itf@musk},%
+ dotsep/.default=4.5mu,%
+ dotsep/.blank=\cftnodots,%
+ dot/.store in=\cftdot,%
+ before/.store as code,%
+ after/.store as code,%
+ columns/before@hook/.is private=interfaces-tocloft,%
+ columns/after@hook/.is private=interfaces-tocloft,%
+ columns/before@hook/.initial=,%
+ columns/after@hook/.initial=,%
+ columns/.code={\ltx@ifpackageloaded{multicol}{%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue\pgfkeyscurrentkey{\number##1}%
+ \ifnum\number##1>\@ne
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/before@hook}\itf@tp
+ \ifx\itf@tp\@empty
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/before@hook}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \multicolsep\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/multicolsep}\relax
+ \begin{multicols}{\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns}}%
+ \columnseprule\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/rule}\relax
+ \columnsep\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/sep}\relax
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/rule/color}\columnseprulecolor
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/multicols/begin}%
+ }%
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/after@hook}{%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/multicols/end}%
+ \end{multicols}
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentkey\@ne
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/before@hook}\@empty
+ \pgfkeyslet{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/after@hook}\@empty
+ \fi}
+ {\PackageError{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Key `columns': package multicol is required}\@eha}%
+ },%
+ columns/.default=2,columns/.blank=1,%
+ multicol/.alias=columns,%
+ multicols/.alias=columns,%
+ twocolumns/.true=\pgfkeysalso{columns=2},%
+ twocolumns/.false=\pgfkeysalso{columns=1},%
+ columns/rule/.store as dimen,%
+ columns/rule/.default=\columnseprule,%
+ columns/rule,% assign default
+ columnseprule/.alias*=columns/rule,%
+ columns/sep/.store as dimen,%
+ columns/sep/.default=\columnsep,%
+ columns/sep/.blank=10\p@,%
+ columns/sep,% assign default
+ columnsep/.alias*=columns/sep,%
+ columns/rule/color/.store as color command,%
+ columns/rule/color,% assign default (\normalcolor)
+ columnseprulecolor/.alias*=columns/rule/color,%
+ columns/rulecolor/.alias*=columns/rule/color,%
+ multicolsep/.store as glue,%
+ multicolsep/.default=0pt plus4pt minus3pt,%
+ multicolsep,% sets default
+ multicols/begin/.initial=,multicols/begin/.default=,%
+ multicols/before/.alias=multicols/begin,%
+ multicols/end/.initial=,multicols/end/.default=,%
+ multicols/after/.alias=multicols/end,%
+ }% \pgfkeys
+ \itf@AfterPackage{interfaces-bookmark}{%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/#1}{%
+ bookmark/.is multiple choice,%
+ bookmark/bold/.true=\pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{,bold=true},%
+ bookmark/bold/.false=\pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{,bold=false},%
+ bookmark/italic/.true=\pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{,italic=true},%
+ bookmark/italic/.false=\pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{,italic=false},%
+ bookmark/color/.code=\pgfkeysaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{,color={##1}},%
+ bookmark/level/.code=\pgfkeysEaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{level={%
+ \ifcsname toclevel@##1\endcsname
+ \csname toclevel@##1\endcsname
+ \else##1\fi}},%
+ bookmark/text/.store as code,%
+ bookmark/text/.default=\contentsname,%
+ bookmark/.unknown/.code=\pgfkeysEaddvalue{/itf/tocloft/#1/bookmark}{}{\pgfkeyscurrentname={##1}},%
+ bookmark/.initial=,%
+ }% \pgfkeys
+ }% AfterPackage interfaces-bookmark
+ %% while making a format \jobname is expanded to the name of the format... Therefore, the following commands must be expanded \AtEndPreamble
+ \AtEndPreamble{%
+ \BeforeFile{\jobname.#1}{%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/before}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/before@hook}%
+ }%
+ \AfterFile{\jobname.#1}{%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/columns/after@hook}%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#1/after}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \ifcsname #1setup\endcsname\else
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/#1}{%
+ pagenumbers/.true=\@cftpnumon{#1},%
+ pagenumbers/.false=\@cftpnumoff{#1},%
+ pagenumber/.alias=pagenumbers
+ }%
+ \expandafter\pretocmd\csname @cftmake#1title\expandafter\endcsname
+ \expandafter{\expandafter\itf@tocloft\csname cft#1title\endcsname{#1}{listof#1}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \expandafter\string\csname @cftmake#1title\endcsname
+ successfully augmented}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \expandafter\string\csname @cftmake#1title\endcsname
+ \space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak Keys label and bookmark won't work for \string\listofsetup}}%
+ \fi
+}% \itf@cft@newlistof
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Then create the keys for \textt{toc},\, \textt{lof},\, and\, \textt{lot}:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\itf@cft@newlistof{toc}
+\itf@cft@newlistof{lof}
+\itf@cft@newlistof{lot}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% Specific to toc only -------------------------------------------------------
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/toc}{%
+ depth/.defcounter=tocdepth,%
+ depth/.value required,%
+ tocdepth/.alias=depth,%
+ title/.store as code in cs=contentsname,%
+ contentsname/.alias=title,%
+ ref/.initial=\contentsname,%
+ ref/.default=\contentsname,%
+ pagenumbers/.style={% boolean key
+ part/pagenumbers={#1},chapter/pagenumbers={#1},section/pagenumbers={#1},%
+ subsubsection/pagenumbers={#1},subsubsection/pagenumbers={#1},%
+ paragraph/pagenumbers={#1},subparagraph/pagenumbers={#1}},%
+ pagenumber/.alias=pagenumbers,%
+}%
+%% Specific to lof and lot ----------------------------------------------------
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/lof}{%
+ title/.store as code in cs=listfigurename,%
+ listfigurename/.alias=title,%
+ ref/.initial=\listfigurename,%
+ ref/.default=\listfigurename,%
+}%
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/lot}{%
+ title/.store as code in cs=listtablename,%
+ listtablename/.alias=title,%
+ ref/.initial=\listtablename,%
+ ref/.default=\listtablename,%
+}%
+\if@cftsubfigopt
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft}{%
+ lof/pagenumbers/.style={figure/pagenumbers={#1},subfigure/pagenumbers={#1}},%
+ lof/pagenumber/.alias=lof/pagenumbers,%
+ lot/pagenumbers/.style={figure/pagenumbers={#1},subfigure/pagenumbers={#1}},%
+ lot/pagenumber/.alias=lot/pagenumbers,%
+}%
+\else
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft}{%
+ lof/pagenumbers/.style={figure/pagenumbers={#1}},%
+ lof/pagenumber/.alias=lof/pagenumbers,%
+ lot/pagenumbers/.style={figure/pagenumbers={#1}},%
+ lot/pagenumber/.alias=lot/pagenumbers,%
+}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cft@sectionname}
+%
+% This macro converts \textt{subsection} into \textt{subsec} \etc. because of
+% \xpackage{tocloft} command names: \cs{cftbeforesubsecskip},\, \cs{cftsubsecindent} \etc.
+%
+% And the keys are either \textt[\opt]{subsec}\, or\, \textt[\opt]{subsection}.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cft@name#1.#2.#3\@nil{cft#1\itf@cft@secname{#2}#3}
+\def\itf@cft@secname#1{%
+ \expandafter\itf@cft@sec@name\csname#1\endcsname{#1}%
+}% \itf@cft@secname
+\def\itf@cft@sec@name#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\chapter chap\else
+ \ifx#1\section sec\else
+ \ifx#1\subsection subsec\else
+ \ifx#1\subsubsection subsubsec\else
+ \ifx#1\paragraph para\else
+ \ifx#1\subparagraph subpara\else
+ \ifx#1\figure fig\else
+ \ifx#1\subsubfigure subfig\else
+ \ifx#1\table tab\else
+ \ifx#1\subtable subtab\else
+ #2\fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+}% \itf@cft@section@name
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Specific handlers for \xpackage{tocloft}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% tocloft setup for tables sections :
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.cft@def/.style={\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.store in cs=\itf@cft@name #1\@nil},%
+ /handlers/.cft@code/.style={\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.store as code in cs=\itf@cft@name #1\@nil},%
+ /handlers/.cft@length/.style={\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.store in skip cs=\itf@cft@name #1\@nil},%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cft@newsection}
+%
+% This macro create the keys for each sectionning command.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cft@newsection#1#2{% #1=part / chap / sec / subsec etc., #2 = #1 = toc | lof | lot
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/tocloft/#2/#1}{%
+ skip/.cft@length=before.#1.skip,%
+ beforeskip/.alias*=skip,%
+ top/.alias*=skip,%
+ indent/.cft@length=.#1.indent,%
+ font/.cft@code=.#1.font,%
+ font/.append code={\pgfkeysalso{/itf/tocloft/#2/#1/pagenumber/font={##1}}},%
+ format/.alias*=font,%
+ number/width/.cft@length=.#1.numwidth,%
+ numwidth/.alias*=number/width,%
+ presnum/.cft@code=.#1.presnum,%
+ number/before/.alias*=presnum,%
+ aftersnum/.cft@code=.#1.aftersnum,%
+ number/after/.alias*=aftersnum,%
+ aftersnumb/.cft@code=.#1.aftersnumb,%
+ title/before/.alias*=aftersnumb,%
+ leader/.cft@def=.#1.leader,%
+ leader/.default=\cftdotfill{\csname\itf@cft@name.#1.dotsep\@nil\endcsname},%
+ leaders/.alias=leader,%
+ dotsep/.code={\itf@units@mu\itf@musk{##1}%
+ \csedef{\itf@cft@name.#1.dotsep\@nil}{\itf@strip@mu\itf@musk}},%
+ dotsep/.default=\cftdotsep,%
+ dotsep/.blank=\cftnodots,%
+ nodots/.code=\csdef{\itf@cft@name.#1.dotsep\@nil}{\cftnodots},%
+ nodots/.value forbidden,%
+ pagefont/.cft@code=.#1.pagefont,%
+ page/font/.alias*=pagefont,%
+ pagenumber/font/.alias*=pagefont,%
+ afterpnum/.cft@code=.#1.afterpnum,%
+ page/after/.alias*=afterpnum,%
+ pagenumber/after/.alias*=afterpnum,%
+ pagenumbers/.on=\@cftpnumon{\itf@cft@secname{#1}},%
+ pagenumbers/.off=\@cftpnumoff{\itf@cft@secname{#1}},%
+ pagenumber/.alias=pagenumbers,%
+ }% \pgfqkeys
+}% \itf@cft@newsection
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@for\itf@tp:=part,chap,chapter,sec,section,subsec,subsection,%
+ subsubsec,subsubsection,para,paragraph,subpara,subparagraph%
+ \do{\expandafter\itf@cft@newsection\expandafter{\itf@tp}{toc}}%
+\if@cftsubfigopt % \@ifpackagewith{tocloft}{subfig} ??
+ \@for\itf@tp:=fig,figure,subfig,subfigure%
+ \do{\expandafter\itf@cft@newsection\expandafter{\itf@tp}{lof}}%
+ \@for\itf@tp:=tab,table,subtab,subtable%
+ \do{\expandafter\itf@cft@newsection\expandafter{\itf@tp}{lot}}%
+\else
+ \@for\itf@tp:=fig,figure%
+ \do{\expandafter\itf@cft@newsection\expandafter{\itf@tp}{lof}}%
+ \@for\itf@tp:=tab,table%
+ \do{\expandafter\itf@cft@newsection\expandafter{\itf@tp}{lot}}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{@cftmaketoctitle (patch)}
+% \begin{macro}{@cftmakeloftitle (patch)}
+% \begin{macro}{@cftmakelottitle (patch)}
+% \begin{macro}{newlistentry (patch)}
+% \patchlabel{@cftmaketoctitle}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\@cftmaketoctitle
+ {\itf@tocloft\contentsname{toc}{tableofcontents}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmaketoctitle\space successfully augmented}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmaketoctitle\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak label and bookmark keys for \string\tocsetup\space won't work}}%
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\@cftmakeloftitle
+ {\itf@tocloft\listfigurename{lof}{listoffigures}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmakeloftitle\space successfully augmented}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmakeloftitle\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak label and bookmark keys for \string\lofsetup\space won't work}}%
+\itf@patch\pretocmd\@cftmakelottitle
+ {\itf@tocloft\listtablename{lot}{listoftables}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmakelottitle\space successfully augmented}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\@cftmakelottitle\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak label and bookmark keys for \string\lotsetup\space won't work}}%
+\@makeother\#
+\itf@patch\apptocmd\newlistentry
+ {\itf@cft@newlistof{#2}}
+ {\PackageInfo{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\newlistentry\space successfully augmented}}
+ {\PackageWarning{interfaces-tocloft}
+ {Command \string\newlistentry\space could not be patched
+ \MessageBreak \string\listofsetup\space will not work}}%
+\catcode`\#=6
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cft@label}
+%
+% \qquad \cs{itf@cft@label} insert the anchor for the table of contents
+% and makes the label (if the key \textt{label} of \cs{tocsetup}, \cs{lofsetup} etc.
+% has been set to a non empty value.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@tocloft#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\itf@cft@label
+ \expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
+}% \itf@tocloft
+\long\def\itf@cft@label#1#2#3#4{%
+ \def#1{#2}% restore original
+ \begingroup
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/tocloft/#3/bookmark}
+ {%
+ \raisedhyperdef{interfaces}{#4}{#2}%
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#3/bookmark/text}\itf@tp
+ \ifx\itf@tp\@empty\else
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#3/bookmark}\@tempa
+ \expandafter\bookmark\expandafter[%
+ \expandafter{\@tempa,dest=interfaces.#4}]%
+ {\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#3/bookmark/text}}%
+ \global\BKM@startatroottrue
+ \fi}
+ {#2}%
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#3/label}\itf@tp
+ \ifx\itf@tp\@empty\else
+ \def\@currentHref{interfaces.#4}%
+ \pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/tocloft/#3/ref}\@currentlabel
+ \def\@currentlabelname{#2}%
+ \label{\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/tocloft/#3/label}}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \gdef\itf@tp{\def#1{#2}\let\itf@tp\@undefined}% restore original
+ \aftergroup\itf@tp % simple group introduced by tocloft to print \contentsname
+}% \itf@cft@label
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</tocloft>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[makecell]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*makecell>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-makecell}
+ [2010/10/12 v1.0 more control on tabular cells (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{makecell}
+\edef\itf@AtEnd{\catcode126 \the\catcode126}% 126 = ~
+\AtEndOfPackage{\itf@AtEnd}
+\catcode126 \active % 126 = ~
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{countvalues}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\countvalues}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\countvalues#1{\number\numexpr
+ \expandafter\itf@countvalues\expandafter0#1,\countvalues\@nnil
+}% \countvalues
+\def\itf@countvalues#1#2,#3\@nnil{%
+ \ifx\countvalues#3%
+ +#1\expandafter\remove@to@nnil
+ \else
+ +1\expandafter\itf@countvalues
+ \fi1#3\@nnil
+}% \itf@countvalues
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@getvalue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@getvalue#1#2{%
+ \romannumeral-`\q\expandafter\itf@getv@lue\expandafter0#1,\itf@getvalue\@nil{#2-1}\@nnil
+}% \itf@getvalue
+\def\itf@getv@lue#1#2,#3\@nil#4\@nnil{%
+ \ifnum\numexpr#1=\numexpr#4\relax
+ #2\expandafter\remove@to@nnil
+ \else\ifx\itf@getvalue#3%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\remove@to@nnil
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\itf@getv@lue
+ \fi\fi{#1+1}#3\@nil#4\@nnil
+}% \itf@getv@lue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{\cs{repeatcell}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\repeatcell}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifitf@celltranspose
+\def\itf@ampactive{%
+ \def\tab{&}%
+ \lccode`\~=38\lowercase{\def~{&}}%
+}% \itf@ampactive
+\newrobustcmd*\repeatcell{\begingroup
+ \let\tab\relax
+ \catcode38\active
+ \itf@repeatcell
+}% \repeatcell
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@repeatcell[3][]{%
+ \ifblank{#1}% alignment option ?
+ {\let\itf@makecell\@firstofone}
+ {\def\itf@makecell##1{\noexpand\makecell[{#1}]{##1}}}%
+ \countdef\itf@col=100% local
+ \countdef\itf@row=101% local
+ \countdef\itf@cnt=102% local
+ \toksdef\itf@cell=1% local
+ \itf@pgfkeys
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/makecell/repeatcell}{@reset={#2},#3}%
+ \toks@{}% local
+ \ifnum\itf@row>\z@ % number
+ \edef\itf@rowloop{\noexpand\@whilenum\itf@row<\the\itf@row}%
+ \def\itf@cell@init{\def\r{\row}\let\R\@empty}%
+ \else % list
+ \def\itf@rowloop{\@for\r:=\itf@rows}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\itf@cell@init\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\R\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\itf@getvalue\expandafter{\expandafter\@empty\itf@rows}}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\itf@col>\z@ % number
+ \edef\itf@colloop{\noexpand\@whilenum\itf@col<\the\itf@col}%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\itf@cell@init\expandafter{%
+ \itf@cell@init\def\c{\column}\let\C\@empty}%
+ \else % list
+ \def\itf@colloop{\@for\c:=\itf@cols}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\itf@cell@init
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\itf@cell@init
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\C\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\itf@getvalue\expandafter{\expandafter\@empty\itf@cols}}}%
+ \fi
+ \itf@cell@init % in case they are used in formulas
+ \ifitf@celltranspose
+ \itf@col\z@
+ \itf@colloop\do{%
+ \ifnum\itf@col>\z@
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr/row\the\itf@col}%
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr/row\the\itf@col}\itf@thecr}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr}\itf@thecr}%
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@\itf@thecr}%
+ \fi
+ \advance\itf@col\@ne
+ \itf@row\z@
+ \itf@rowloop\do{%
+ \advance\itf@row\@ne
+ \ifnum\itf@row>\@ne
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@&}%
+ \fi
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
+ \itf@cell@init\itf@ampactive}%
+ \itf@cell@insert}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \itf@row\z@
+ \itf@rowloop\do{%
+ \ifnum\itf@row>\z@
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr/row\the\itf@row}%
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr/row\the\itf@row}\itf@thecr}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr}\itf@thecr}%
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@\itf@thecr}%
+ \fi
+ \advance\itf@row\@ne
+ \itf@col\z@
+ \itf@colloop\do{%
+ \advance\itf@col\@ne
+ \ifnum\itf@col>\@ne
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@&}%
+ \fi
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
+ \itf@cell@init\itf@ampactive}%
+ \itf@cell@insert}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \itf@message{Code introduced by repeatcell in the \@currenvir:\the\toks@}% (to see the code...)
+ \expandafter\endgroup\the\toks@
+ \ignorespaces
+}% \itf@repeatcell
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\itf@message\@gobble
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now the keys for \cs{repeatcell}:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cell@rowcolkey{%
+ \removefromstart\pgfkeyscurrentname{row}%
+ \ifin@\else
+ \removefromstart\pgfkeyscurrentname{col}%
+ \fi
+ \ifin@
+ \itf@number\itf@cnt\pgfkeyscurrentname\relax\@nnil
+ {\pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentkey\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}
+ \in@false
+ \fi
+ \ifin@\else
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/errors/unknown key/.@cmd}\pgfkeyscurrentkey
+ \pgfkeyscurrentvalue
+ \pgfeov
+ \fi
+}% \itf@cell@rowcolkey
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/makecell/repeatcell}{%
+ font/.store in=\itf@cellfont,%
+ font/.unknown/.code=\itf@cell@rowcolkey,%
+ text/.store in=\itf@celltext,%
+ text/.default=\ifdefined\C\C\column\fi,%
+ text/.unknown/.code=\itf@cell@rowcolkey,%
+ cr/.initial=\\,%
+ cr/.default=\crcr,cr/.blank=\\,end/.alias=cr,%
+ cr/.unknown/.code=\itf@cell@rowcolkey,%
+ rows/.code=\itf@number\itf@row#1\relax\@nnil
+ {\ifnum\itf@row<\z@\itf@row\@ne\fi}
+ {\itf@row\z@
+ \def\itf@rows{#1}\itf@expandonceifcs\itf@rows},%
+ rows/.default=1,rows/.blank=1,%
+ @cols/.is private=interfaces-makecell,%
+ column/.is private=interfaces-makecell,%
+ row/.is private=interfaces-makecell,%
+ transpose/.is if=itf@celltranspose,%
+ .unknown/.code=%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text \itf@cell@formulaerror{}\z@ \fi
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\@empty \itf@cell@formulaerror{}\@ne \fi
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{\pgfkeyscurrentkey/@calc}%
+ {\itf@cell@formulaerror{}\tw@}
+ {\pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentkey/@calc}\relax}%
+ \itf@cell@getformula{#1}%
+ \pgfkeysEaddvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/@calc}{}
+ {\the\toks@\expandafter\noexpand\csname\pgfkeyscurrentname\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname\pgfkeyscurrentname\endcsname\@undefined,% (order of evaluation => "undefined cs")
+ @reset/.code=% #1 are the columns
+ \itf@celltransposefalse
+ \let\itf@celltext\@empty
+ \let\itf@cellfont\@empty
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/cr}{\\}%
+ \itf@row\@ne
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/@calc}{%
+ \itf@cell@numcalc\itf@col\column
+ \itf@cell@numcalc\itf@row\row}%
+ \itf@number\itf@col#1\relax\@nnil
+ {\ifnum\itf@col<\z@\itf@col\@ne\fi}
+ {\itf@col\z@
+ \def\itf@cols{#1}\itf@expandonceifcs\itf@cols},%
+}% keys for \repeatcell
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@getformula}
+% Determines whether the formula should be evaluated with \cs{numexpr}, with \$\cs{pgfmath}\$ or \$\$\cs{FPeval}\$\$:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cell@getformula#1{%
+ \itf@cell@getf@rmula #1$$$\itf@cell@getformula$\relax\@nnil
+ \expandafter\ifx\expandafter\toks@\the\toks@
+ \itf@cell@formulaerror{#1}\thr@@
+ \fi
+}% \itf@cell@getformula
+\def\itf@cell@getf@rmula #1$#2$#3$#4#5$#6{%
+ \toks@{\toks@}%
+ \ifx\itf@cell@getformula #4%
+ \toks@{\itf@cell@numcalc{#1}}%
+ \else\ifx $#4%
+ \ifx\itf@cell@getformula #6%
+ \ifdefined\pgfmathparse\else\itf@cell@formulaerror{#2}4\fi
+ \toks@{\itf@cell@pgfcalc{#2}}%
+ \else\ifx $#6%
+ \ifdefined\FPeval\else\itf@cell@formulaerror{#3}5\fi
+ \toks@{\itf@cell@FPcalc{#3}}%
+ \fi\fi
+ \fi\fi\remove@to@nnil
+}% \itf@cell@getf@rmula
+\def\itf@cell@formulaerror#1#2{%
+ \def\itf@tp{#1}\@onelevel@sanitize\itf@tp
+ \ifcase#2% 0
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Missing formula for key \pgfkeyscurrentname!}\@ehd
+ \or %1
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Computed key \pgfkeyscurrentname\space wes left blank!}\@ehd
+ \or %2
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Duplicate definition for computed key \pgfkeyscurrentname
+ \MessageBreak\string\repeatcell\space will redefine the key}\@eha
+ \or %3
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Incorrect formula in \string\repeatcell
+ \MessageBreak Check: \itf@tp
+ \MessageBreak Take care of commas and equal signs...}\@ehd
+ \or %4
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Formula: \itf@tp
+ \MessageBreak requires \string\pgfmathparse:\space\string\usetikz{pgfmath}}\@ehd
+ \or %5
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Formula: \itf@tp
+ \MessageBreak requires \string\FPeval:\space\string\usepackage{fp}}\@ehd
+ \else
+ \PackageError{interfaces-makecell}
+ {Impossible value!}\@ehd
+ \fi
+}% \itf@cell@formulaerror
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ClearPage*
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@calc}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@numcalc}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@pgfcalc}
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@FPcalc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\protected\def\itf@cell@calc#1#2{%
+ \edef#1{\def\noexpand#1{#2}}%
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@#1}%
+ #1%
+}% \itf@cell@calc
+\protected\def\itf@cell@numcalc#1#2{%
+ \itf@cell@calc#2{\number\numexpr#1}%
+}% \itf@cell@numcalc
+\protected\def\itf@cell@pgfcalc#1#2{%
+ \pgfmathparse{#1}%
+ \itf@cell@calc#2\pgfmathresult
+}% \itf@cell@pgfcalc
+\protected\def\itf@cell@FPcalc#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \setbox\z@\vbox{%\FPeval introduces some weird code, hence the calculation in a \vbox
+ \FPeval\FPresult{#1}%
+ \global\let\FPresult\FPresult}%
+ \endgroup
+ \itf@cell@calc#2\FPresult
+}% \itf@cell@FPcalc
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@cell@insert}
+% Insert a cell (into the temporary \cs{toks@} token register):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@cell@getifdefined#1#2{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/#1}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/#1}#2}
+ {\let#2\@empty}%
+}%
+\def\itf@cell@insert{%
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/makecell/repeatcell/@calc}%
+ \ifx\R\@empty\else
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\r\expandafter{\r}}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\C\@empty\else
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\c\expandafter{\c}}%
+ \fi
+ \itf@cell@getifdefined{font/row\the\itf@row}\itf@cellfontrow
+ \itf@cell@getifdefined{font/col\the\itf@col}\itf@cellfontcol
+ \itf@cell@getifdefined{text/row\the\itf@row}\itf@cellrow
+ \itf@cell@getifdefined{text/col\the\itf@col}\itf@cellcol
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@\itf@cellfont}%
+ \ifx\itf@cellrow\@empty
+ \ifx\itf@cellcol\@empty
+ \itf@cell\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\itf@cellfontcol\itf@cellfontrow}%
+ \let\itf@tp\itf@celltext
+ \else
+ \itf@cell\expandafter{\itf@cellfontcol}%
+ \let\itf@tp\itf@cellcol
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifx\itf@cellcol\@empty
+ \itf@cell\expandafter{\itf@cellfontrow}%
+ \let\itf@tp\itf@cellrow
+ \else
+ \itf@cell{}%
+ \ifitf@celltranspose
+ \edef\itf@tp{\noexpand\itf@diaghead(-2,1)
+ {\expandonce\itf@cellfontrow\expandonce\itf@cellrow}
+ {\expandonce\itf@cellfontcol\expandonce\itf@cellcol}}%
+ \else
+ \edef\itf@tp{\noexpand\itf@diaghead(-2,1)
+ {\expandonce\itf@cellfontcol\expandonce\itf@cellcol}
+ {\expandonce\itf@cellfontrow\expandonce\itf@cellrow}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \itf@cell\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\itf@cell\itf@tp}%
+ \edef\itf@tp{\itf@makecell{\the\itf@cell}}%
+ \toks@\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \expandafter\the\expandafter\toks@\itf@tp}%
+}% \itf@cell@insert
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@diaghead}
+% A helper macro to \xpackage{makecell}'s \cs{diaghead}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@diaghead(#1)#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\itf@tp{%
+ \noexpand\diaghead({#1}){\unexpanded{#2 #3}}%
+ {\unexpanded{#2}}
+ {\unexpanded{#3}}}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup\itf@tp
+}% \itf@diaghead
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{colortbl: patch for \cs{CT@cellc}}
+% \patchlabel[corr.]{CT@cellc}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\CT@cellc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AfterPackage*{colortbl}{%
+\def\CT@cellc#1[#2]#3{% #1 is either \@firstofone or \@gobble, [#2]#3 = color spec
+ \xdef\CT@cell@color{\noexpand\CT@color#1{[{#2}]}{#3}%
+ \global\let\noexpand\CT@cell@color\relax}%
+}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</makecell>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Subsection[enumitem]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*enumitem>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-enumitem}
+ [2010/10/12 v1.0 more control on lists (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{enumitem}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\interitem}
+% Like \xpackage{amstext} \cs{intertext}, \cs{interitem} allows to add some non indented text
+% inside a list environment:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providerobustcmd*\interitem{%
+ \item[]\hskip-\leftmargin
+}% \interitem
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\setlist (extension, star form)}
+% \patchlabel[redef]{setlist}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\setlist{\begingroup \@ifstar
+ {\let\do\csgappto \itf@setlist}
+ {\let\do\csgdef \itf@setlist}%
+}% \setlist
+\newrobustcmd*\itf@setlist[2][0]{%
+ \let\enit@a\@empty
+ \let\enit@b\@empty
+ \@for\x:=#1\do{%
+ \ifx\x\@empty\else
+ \itf@number\count@\x\relax\@nnil
+ {\edef\enit@b{\enit@b,\the\count@}}
+ {\edef\enit@a{\enit@a,\x}}%
+ \fi}%
+ \ifx\enit@a\@empty\def\enit@a{list}\fi
+ \ifx\enit@b\@empty\def\enit@b{0}\fi
+ \@for\a:=\enit@a\do{%
+ \ifx\a\@empty\else
+ \@for\b:=\enit@b\do{%
+ \ifx\b\@empty\else
+ \ifcsundef{end\a}
+ {\expandafter\itf@setlist@error\expandafter{\a}}
+ {\do{enit@@\a\romannumeral\b}{#2}}%
+ \fi}%
+ \fi}
+ \endgroup
+}% \itf@setlist
+\def\itf@setlist@error#1{%
+ \PackageError{interfaces-enumitem}
+ {Environment `#1` is undefined
+ \MessageBreak Use \string\newlist\space before \string\setlist
+ \MessageBreak Your command will be ignored}\@eha
+}% \itf@setlist@error
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</enumitem>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[truncate]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*truncate>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-truncate}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\trunctext}
+% \cs{trunctext} is like \cs{truncate} but leaves the text to its natural width if possible.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd\trunctext[3][\TruncateMarker]{% do nothing if width of #3 is less than #2
+ \begingroup
+ \hbadness\maxdimen\hfuzz\vsize
+ \setbox\z@=\hbox to\dimexpr#2\relax{\ignorespaces#3\unskip}%
+ \ifnum\badness>\@M
+ \def\next{\truncate[{#1}]{#2}{#3}}%
+ \else \def\next{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\endgroup\next
+}% \trunctext
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\htruncadjust}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd\htruncadjust[1]{\@testopt
+ {\itf@htruncadjust{#1}}{}%
+}% \htruncadjust
+\long\def\itf@htruncadjust#1[#2]#3{% #1=total width, #2=[x_1,...,x_n], #3=text_1,...,text_n
+ \begingroup
+ \let\itf@trunc@width\@empty
+ \let\itf@istruncated\@gobble % to remove the first comma
+ \let\the@dimen\relax
+ \count@\z@ \dimen@\z@
+ \ifblank{#2}% no optional [x_1,...,x_n] parameters
+ {%
+ \@for\x:=#3\do{%
+ \advance \count@ \@ne
+ \setbox\z@=\hbox{\ignorespaces\x\unskip}%
+ \dimen\count@ = \wd\z@
+ \toks\count@\expandafter{\the\dimen\count@}%
+ \advance\dimen@ \dimen\count@}%
+ }
+ {%
+ \@for\x:=#2\do{%
+ \advance \count@ \@ne
+ \toks\count@\expandafter{\x\p@}%
+ \advance\dimen@ \x\p@
+ \dimen\count@ -\@ne\p@}%
+ }%
+ \advance\count@\@ne \dimendef\itf@freespace=\count@
+ \advance\count@\@ne \dimendef\itf@tempdim=\count@
+ \advance\count@\@ne \dimendef\itf@sum=\count@
+ \count@\z@ %%dimen0=\the\dimen@\quad\number\dimen@\par
+ \itf@freespace\z@ % free space left when w_i < x_i/sum(x_i) * total
+ \@for\x:=#3\do{%
+ \advance \count@ \@ne
+ \ifdim \dimen\count@<\z@ % not measured before
+ \setbox\z@=\hbox{\ignorespaces\x\unskip}%
+ \dimen\count@ = \wd\z@
+ \fi
+ \itf@tempdim = \itf@scaledimen{#1}*\the\toks\count@/\dimen@\relax
+ \ifdim \dimen\count@ > \itf@tempdim
+ \dimen\count@ = \itf@tempdim
+ \edef\itf@istruncated{\itf@istruncated,\the\count@}%
+ \advance\itf@sum by\the\toks\count@
+ \else
+ \advance\itf@freespace \itf@tempdim
+ \advance\itf@freespace -\dimen\count@
+ \fi
+ \edef\itf@trunc@width{\itf@trunc@width\the\count@{\the@dimen\the\count@}}%
+ }%
+%% Free space=\the\itf@freespace\par
+ \ifdim\itf@freespace > \z@ % reinsert free space proportionally
+ \ifx\itf@istruncated\@gobble\else
+ \@for\x:=\itf@istruncated\do{%
+ \advance\dimen\x by\itf@scaledimen\itf@freespace*\the\toks\x/\itf@sum\relax
+ }%
+ \fi\fi
+ \def\the@dimen{\the\dimen}%
+ \edef\itf@trunc@width{\itf@trunc@width}%
+ \expandafter\endgroup
+ \expandafter\def
+ \expandafter\itf@trunc@width
+ \expandafter{\itf@trunc@width}%
+%% total=\the\dimexpr#1\relax
+}% \itf@htruncadjust
+\def\itf@scalefactor#1#2{\strip@pt\dimexpr#1*65536/\number#2\relax}
+\def\itf@scaledimen#1*#2/#3\relax{%
+ \dimexpr\itf@scalefactor{#2}{#3}\dimexpr#1\relax\relax
+}% \itf@scaledimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\htruncwidth}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\htruncwidth[1]{% purely expandable
+ \expandafter\itf@htruncwidth\itf@trunc@width\relax\relax\@nnil{#1}%
+}% \htruncwidth
+\def\itf@htruncwidth#1#2#3\@nnil#4{%
+ \ifx\relax#1\itf@trunc@nosuchwidth{#4}%
+ \else\ifnum#1=#4
+ #2%
+ \else
+ \itf@htruncwidth#3\@nnil{#4}%
+ \fi\fi
+}% \itf@htruncwidth
+\def\itf@trunc@nosuchwidth#1{%
+ \PackageError{interfaces-truncate}
+ {You requested the width for text nr#1
+ \MessageBreak but there is no such text
+ \MessageBreak Therefore no such width!}\@ehd
+}% \itf@trunc@nosuchwidth
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</truncate>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \sectionformat\subsection{bookmark/color=black}
+%
+% \subsection{interface fancyvrb}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fancyvrb>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-fancyvrb}
+ [2010/08/22 v1.0 Custom verbatim environments (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{fancyvrb}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+\def\itf@tp#1{%
+\DefineVerbatimEnvironment{itf:VerbLines}{Verbatim}
+ {gobble=#1,frame=lines,framesep=6pt,fontseries=m}
+\DefineVerbatimEnvironment{itf:Verb}{Verbatim}
+ {gobble=#1,fontseries=m}
+\DefineVerbatimEnvironment{itf:Verb*}{Verbatim}
+ {gobble=#1,fontseries=m,commandchars=$()}
+}
+\ltx@ifpackageloaded{doc}
+ {\itf@tp{1}}
+ {\itf@tp{0}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\ifdefined\VerbLines\else
+\ifdefined\endVerbLines\else
+ \letcs\VerbLines{itf:VerbLines}%
+ \letcs\endVerbLines{enditf:VerbLines}%
+\fi\fi
+\ifdefined\Verb\else\ifdefined\endVerb\else
+ \letcs\Verb{itf:Verb}%
+ \letcs\endVerb{enditf:Verb}%
+\fi\fi
+\ifcsname Verb*\endcsname\else
+\ifcsname endVerb*\endcsname\else
+ \csletcs{Verb*}{itf:Verb*}%
+ \csletcs{endVerb*}{enditf:Verb*}%
+\fi\fi
+}
+%</fancyvrb>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[appendix]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*appendix>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-appendix}
+ [2010/10/20 v1.0 easy control of appendices environment (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{appendix}
+\itf@pgfkeys
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendices}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\itf@appendices@pp\appendices
+\let\itf@endappendices@pp\endappendices
+\let\itf@appendices@pp\appendices
+\let\itf@endappendices@pp\endappendices
+\renewenvironment{appendices}[1][]{%
+ \pgfqkeys{/itf/appendix/appendices}{#1}%
+ \itf@appendices@pp
+ }
+ {\itf@endappendices@pp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfqkeys{/itf/appendix/appendices}{%
+ title/.store as code in cs=appendixpagename,%
+ title/.append code=\ifx\appendixpagename\@empty \@dopage@ppfalse
+ \else \@dopage@pptrue\fi,%
+ title/.value required,%
+ intoc/.is if=@dotoc@pp,%
+ intoc/title/.store as code in cs=appendixtocname,%
+ intoc/title/.append code=\ifx\appendixtocname\@empty \@dotoc@ppfalse
+ \else \@dotoc@pptrue\fi,%
+ intoc/title/.default=\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/appendix/appendices/title},%
+ section/.is enum={section,chapter},%
+ section/.append code={%
+ \ifcase\pgfkeysvalueof{/itf/appendix/appendices/section/.number}\relax
+ \@chapter@ppfalse\or\@chapter@pptrue\fi
+ \if@chapter@pp\ifundef\chapter{%
+ \PackageError{interfaces-appendix}
+ {You asked chapter-style appendices but your
+ \MessageBreak current class does not provide chapters!}\@eha
+ \pgfkeysalso{/itf/appendix/appendices/section}}{}%
+ \fi},%
+ chapter/.style={section=chapter},%
+ chapter/.value forbidden,%
+}% keys for appendices environment
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</appendix>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[embedfile]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*embedfile>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-embedfile}
+ [2010/06/20 v1.0 easy macros to embed files into pdf (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\itf@Check@Package{embedfile}
+\newrobustcmd*\embedthisfile{\@ifstar
+ \embedthisfile@main
+ \embedthisfile@all
+}% \embedthisfile
+\@onlypreamble\embedthisfile
+\def\embedthisfile@main{\embedfile{\jobname.tex}}
+\def\embedthisfile@all{%
+ \embedthisfile@main
+ \AfterPreamble{%
+ \ltx@ifundefined{@listfiles}
+ {\let\@listfiles\@empty}% to avoid: \global\let\@fileslist\relax in \document
+ {}%
+ }%
+ \gpreto\@enddocumenthook{%
+ \let\do\itf@EmbedOne
+ \expandafter\docsvlist\expandafter{\@filelist}%
+ }%
+}% \embedthisfile@all
+\def\itf@EmbedOne#1{\itf@Embed@ne#1.tex\@nil}
+\def\itf@Embed@ne#1.tex#2\@nil{%
+ \ltx@ifundefined{cp@#1}
+ {}
+ {\ifblank{#2}
+ {}
+ {\embedfile{#1.tex}}}%
+}% \itf@Embed@ne
+%</embedfile>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[environ]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*environ>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-environ}
+ [2010/07/23 v1.0 ReNewEnviron = RenewEnviron (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\AfterPackage{environ}{
+ \ifundef\ReNewEnviron
+ {\let\ReNewEnviron\RenewEnviron}
+ {}%
+}%
+%</environ>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Subsection[umrand]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*umrand>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-umrand}
+ [2010/07/23 v1.0 patch for umrand.sty ifnotempty (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\BeforePackage{umrand}{%
+ \let\itf@newif\newif
+ \def\itf@tp{\ifnotempty}%
+ \def\newif#1{\def\x{#1}\ifx\x\itf@tp \expandafter\@gobble
+ \else\expandafter\ltx@newif\fi{#1}}%
+}
+\AfterPackage{umrand}{%
+ \let\newif\itf@newif
+ \let\itf@newif\@undefined
+}
+%</umrand>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \Subsection[scrlfile]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*scrlfile>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-scrlfile}
+ [2010/08/09 v1.0 scrlfile hooks improved (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@pkgextension}
+% \begin{macro}{\@clsextension}
+% \patchlabel{@pkgextension}\patchlabel{@clsextension}
+% In \LaTeX{} they are defined \cs{@onlypreamble}. So we use the \xpackage{ltxcmds} equivalents:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AfterEndPreamble{%
+ \let\@pkgextension\ltx@pkgextension
+ \let\@clsextension\ltx@clsextension
+ \let\@ifpackageloaded\ltx@ifpackageloaded
+ \let\@ifclassloaded\ltx@ifclassloaded
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@load@hook}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\scr@load@hook[2]{%
+ \csuse{#2-@#1}%
+ \ifcsname#2-@#1-\string\keep\endcsname\else\global\csundef{#2-@#1}\fi
+}% \scr@load@hook
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\scr@set@load@hook (optimisation)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\scr@set@load@hook[2]{\csgappto{#2-@#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\BeforeFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\AfterFile}
+%
+% Addition of star forms \stform*: the hooks are not canceled
+% after \textt{input} (in case a file is input more than once...)
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewrobustcmd*\BeforeFile{\@ifstar
+ {\itf@s@LoadFile{before}}
+ {\itf@LoadFile{before}}%
+}% \BeforeFile
+\renewrobustcmd*\AfterFile{\@ifstar
+ {\itf@s@LoadFile{after}}
+ {\itf@LoadFile{after}}%
+}% \AfterFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@s@LoadFile#1#2{%
+ \global\cslet{#2-@#1-\string\keep}\@empty
+ \scr@set@load@hook{#1}{#2}%
+}% \itf@s@LoadFile
+\def\itf@LoadFile#1#2{%
+ \global\csundef{#2-@#1-\string\keep}%
+ \scr@set@load@hook{#1}{#2}%
+}% \itf@LoadFile
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@input (patch)}
+%
+% This modification allows \cs{@input} to behaves like \cs{InputIfFileExists}
+% as far as hooks are concerned. \patchlabel{@input}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\@input[1]{\IfFileExists{#1}
+ {\scr@load@hook{before}{#1}%
+ \@@input\@filef@und
+ \scr@load@hook{after}{#1}}%
+ {\typeout{No file #1.}}%
+}% \@input
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</scrlfile>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \sectionformat\subsection{bookmark/color*=copper}
+% \Subsection[pgfkeys]
+%
+% \subsubsection{interfaces-pgfkeys}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*pgfkeys>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-pgfkeys}
+ [2010/10/22 v1.1 pgfkeys handlers definitions (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \let\itf@pgfkeys@unpack\pgfkeys@unpack
+ \let\itf@pgfkeys@case@three\pgfkeys@case@three
+ \let\itf@pgfkeys@exp@call\pgfkeys@exp@call
+ \let\itf@pgfkeysaddvalue\pgfkeysaddvalue
+}% AtEndOfPackage
+\def\itf@pgfkeys{%
+ \global\let\pgfkeys@unpack\itf@pgfkeys@unpack
+ \global\let\pgfkeys@case@three\itf@pgfkeys@case@three
+ \global\let\pgfkeys@exp@call\itf@pgfkeys@exp@call
+ \global\let\pgfkeysaddvalue\itf@pgfkeysaddvalue
+}% \itf@pgfkeys
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \itf@pgfkeys
+ \let\itf@pgfkeys\relax
+}% AtBeginDocument
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{Some new pgfkeys macros}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeysmeaning}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand*\pgfkeysmeaning[1]{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{#1}
+ {\expandafter\meaning\csname pgfk@#1\endcsname}
+ {\meaning\@undefined}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded#1{%
+ \unexpanded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \csname pgfk@#1\endcsname}%
+}% \pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph{Some pgfkeys macros redefinition/corrections}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeysEsetvalue}
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeysaddvalue (bug correction)}
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeysEaddvalue}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\pgfkeysEsetvalue[2]{%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname pgfk@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+}% \pgfkeysEsetvalue
+\renewrobustcmd*\pgfkeysaddvalue[3]{% \cspreappto{pgfk@#1}{#2}{#3} (bug in pgfkeys.code.tex)
+ \edef\pgfkeys@global@temp{%
+ \unexpanded{#2}%
+ \ifcsname pgfk@#1\endcsname
+ \unexpanded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \csname pgfk@#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \unexpanded{#3}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{#1}\pgfkeys@global@temp
+}% \pgfkeysaddvalue
+\newrobustcmd*\pgfkeysEaddvalue[3]{% \csepreappto{pgfk@#1}{#2}{#3}
+ \edef\pgfkeys@global@temp{%
+ #2%
+ \ifcsname pgfk@#1\endcsname
+ \unexpanded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+ \csname pgfk@#1\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ #3}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{#1}\pgfkeys@global@temp
+}% \pgfkeysaddvalue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pgfkeys@exp@call}
+% Missed the braces around the argument (in case the argument contains a comma or an $=$ sign...):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% missed a pair of braces around the argument in pgfkeys.code.tex ( code could break if it contains = or , )
+\def\pgfkeys@exp@call#1{\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath={#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.blank){Handlers \handler/.blank/}
+% \patchlabel[redef]{pgfkeys@unpack}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% The value is now checked by \itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required:
+\def\pgfkeys@unpack#1=#2=#3\pgfkeys@stop{%
+ \pgfkeys@spdef\pgfkeyscurrentkey{#1}%
+ \edef\pgfkeyscurrentkey{\pgfkeyscurrentkey}%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentkey\pgfkeys@empty
+ % Skip
+ \else%
+ \pgfkeys@add@path@as@needed
+ \pgfkeys@spdef\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{#2}%
+ \itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required % <FC>
+ \pgfkeyscurrentkey % <FC>
+ \pgfkeys@case@one % <FC>
+ \fi
+}% \pgfkeys@unpack
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required}
+%
+% \hskip4cm Handle the case: \handler/.@def/ \smex \handler/.@blank/ \smex \handler/.@def/ ...
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required#1#2{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text% Hmm... no value
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{#1/.@def}%
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{#1/.@def}\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}
+ {}% no default, so leave it
+ \fi
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\@empty
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{#1/.@blank}
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{#1/.@blank}\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}
+ {}% no /.blank specified
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text% in case /.blank -> \pgfkeysnovalue
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{#1/.@def}%
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{#1/.@def}\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}
+ {}% no default, so leave it
+ \fi\fi
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysvaluerequired
+ \pgfkeysvalueof{/errors/value required/.@cmd}\pgfkeyscurrentkey
+ \pgfkeyscurrentvalue
+ \pgfeov
+ \else
+ #2%
+ \fi
+}% \itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.default){Allowing \handler/.default/ values (and \handler/.blank/ values) for handlers:}
+% \patchlabel{pgfkeys@case@three}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% To handle the cases of: /handler/.default= /handler/.blank= /handler/.value required,
+%% it is necessary to redefine \pgfkeys@case@three
+\renewcommand*\pgfkeys@case@three{%
+ \pgfkeys@split@path
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{/handlers/\pgfkeyscurrentname/.@cmd}
+ {%
+ \itf@pgfkeys@default@blank@required{/handlers/\pgfkeyscurrentname}%
+ {\pgfkeysgetvalue{/handlers/\pgfkeyscurrentname/.@cmd}\pgfkeys@code
+ \expandafter\pgfkeys@code\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfeov}%
+ }
+ \pgfkeys@unknown % no handler, thus the key is unknown
+}% \pgfkeys@case@three
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.alias){Handlers definition: \handler/.alias/, \handler/.blank/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.alias/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@ifaliasexists{#1}{%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{\noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1={##1}}}},%
+ /handlers/.alias/.value required,%
+ /handlers/.blank/.code=\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}{#1},%
+ /handlers/.blank/.default=\pgfkeysnovalue,%
+}% /.alias and /.blank
+\def\itf@pgfkeys@ifaliasexists#1#2{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1/.@cmd}{#2}
+ {\pgfkeysifdefined{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1}
+ {#2}
+ {\itf@pgfkeys@aliaserror{#1}}}%
+}% \itf@pgfkeys@ifaliasexists
+\def\itf@pgfkeys@aliaserror#1{%
+ \PackageError{interfaces-pgfkeys}
+ {You want the key \pgfkeyscurrentpath\space
+ \MessageBreak to be an alias for \pgfkeysdefaultpath#1
+ \MessageBreak but the key \pgfkeysdefaultpath#1
+ \MessageBreak is not defined!}\@eha\@gobble
+}% \itf@pgfkeys@aliaserror
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.alias*){Handlers definition: \handler/.alias*/}
+%
+% For use with handlers \handler/.store as glue/ or \handler/.store as glue in cs/ \etc. when a handler
+% defines key with \stform* version and/or \stform+ version and/or \stform- versions.
+%
+% Then, the \handler/.alias*/ handler is a facility to create aliases for starred \stform*, \stform+, \stform-
+% keys in a batch (as long as the alias exists, of course).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{
+ /handlers/.alias*/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@ifaliasexists{#1}{%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{\noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1={##1}}}%
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysifdefined{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1\x/.@cmd}
+ {\pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeysdefaultpath#1\x={##1}}}}
+ {}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.alias*/.value required,%
+}% /.alias*
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.is private){Handlers definition: \handler/.is private/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.is private/.code=\pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \PackageError{#1}{Key \pgfkeyscurrentkey\space is private
+ \MessageBreak and should not be modified}\@ehd},%
+ /handlers/.is private to class/.code=\pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ClassError{#1}{Key \pgfkeyscurrentkey\space is private
+ \MessageBreak and should not be modified}\@ehd}%
+}% /.is private
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \paragraph(/.true){Handlers definition: \handler/.true/ \handler/.false/ \handler/.on/ \handler/.off/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@pgfkeys@choice[#1]#2#3{%
+ \pgfkeys{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.cd,%
+ .is choice,%
+ #2/.code={#3},%
+ .default/.expanded=\@firstoftwo#1}%
+}% \itf@pgfkeys@choice
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.true/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@choice[{true}{false}]{true}{#1},%
+ /handlers/.false/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@choice[{true}{false}]{false}{#1},%
+ /handlers/.on/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@choice[{on}{off}]{on}{#1},%
+ /handlers/.off/.code=\itf@pgfkeys@choice[{on}{off}]{off}{#1},%
+}% /.true /.false
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store in cs, /.estore in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store in cs/ \handler/.estore in cs/ etc.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store in cs/.code=\pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{\csdef{#1}{##1}},%
+ /handlers/.estore in cs/.code=\pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{\csedef{#1}{##1}},%
+}% /.store in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as code){Handler definition: \handler/.store as code/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%% /.store as code handlers
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as code/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\noexpand\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\@empty
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\@empty
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded={%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \noexpand\unexpanded{##1}}}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}\@empty
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as code/.default=*+,%
+}% /.store as code
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as code){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as code/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as code/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{##1}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\@empty
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded={%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \noexpand\unexpanded{##1}}}}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.estore as code/.default=*+,%
+}% /.estore as code
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as code in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as code in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as code in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csdef{#1}{##1}\fi}%
+ \@tfor\x:=*+\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded={%
+ \noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ \noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\expandonce
+ \noexpand\csname#1\endcsname
+ \noexpand\fi
+ \noexpand\unexpanded{##1}}}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}\@empty
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as code in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store as code in cs
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as code in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csedef{#1}{##1}\fi}%
+ \@tfor\x:=*+\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded={%
+ \noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ \noexpand\expandafter\noexpand\expandonce
+ \noexpand\csname#1\endcsname
+ \noexpand\fi
+ \noexpand\unexpanded{##1}}}}%
+ }},% default if \pgfkeysnovalue which expands to \@empty
+ /handlers/.estore as code in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.estore as code in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as color){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as color/, \handler/.store as color command/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\protected\def\itf@pgfk@color#1#2\@nil{%
+ \ifx\@let@token\color
+ \def\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{#2}%
+ \else\ifx\@let@token\normalcolor
+ \def\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{default}%
+ \else\ifx\@let@token\pgfkeysnovalue
+ \def\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{default}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}% \itf@pgfk@color
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as color/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \futurelet\noexpand\@let@token\itf@pgfk@color
+ ##1\noexpand\pgfkeysnovalue\noexpand\@nil
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\noexpand\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}%
+}% /.store as color
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as color in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as color in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as color in cs/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \futurelet\noexpand\@let@token\itf@pgfk@color
+ ##1\noexpand\pgfkeysnovalue\noexpand\@nil
+ \cslet{#1}\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}%
+}% /.store as color in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as color command){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as color command/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\protected\def\itf@pgfk@colorcmd#1\@nil{%
+ \ifcat @\noexpand\@let@token
+ \def\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{\color{#1}}%
+ \else\ifcat 0\noexpand\@let@token
+ \def\pgfkeyscurrentvalue{\color{#1}}%
+ \else\ifx\@let@token\@nil
+ \let\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\normalcolor
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}% \itf@pgfk@colorcmd
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as color command/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \futurelet\noexpand\@let@token\itf@pgfk@colorcmd
+ ##1\noexpand\@nil
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\noexpand\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}%
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\normalcolor
+}% /.store as color command
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as color command in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as color command in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as color command in cs/.code=%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \futurelet\noexpand\@let@token\itf@pgfk@colorcmd
+ ##1\noexpand\@nil
+ \cslet{#1}\noexpand\pgfkeyscurrentvalue}%
+ \pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\normalcolor
+}% /.store as color command in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as number){Handlers definition \handler/.store as number/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as number/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \normalcolor\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{\numexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded=%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \x
+ \numexpr\unexpanded{##1}\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as number/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.store as number
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as number){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as number/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as number/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{\number\numexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \x
+ \numexpr##1\relax}}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.estore as number/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.estore as number
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph{/.store as number in cs}{Handlers definition: \handler/.store as number in cs/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as number in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csdef{#1}{\numexpr##1\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \letcs\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ #1\noexpand\else z@\noexpand\fi}%
+ \edef\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath={%
+ \noexpand\expandonce\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp
+ \x
+ \numexpr\noexpand\unexpanded{##1}\relax}}%
+ }\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as number in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store as number in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as number in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as number in cs/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as number in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csedef{#1}{\number\numexpr##1\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \noexpand\csname\noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ #1\noexpand\else z@\noexpand\fi\endcsname
+ \x
+ \numexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.estore as number in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.estore as number in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.defcounter){Handlers definition: \handler/.defcounter/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.defcounter/.code=\pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{\defcounter{#1}{##1}}%
+}% /.defcounter
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as glue){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as glue/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as glue/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{\glueexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@skip
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@skip
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@skip
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded=%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \x
+ \if*\x\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\glueexpr\noexpand\unexpanded{##1}\relax\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as glue/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.store as glue
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as glue){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as glue/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as glue/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{%
+ \noexpand\the\glueexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@skip
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@skip
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@skip
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\x
+ \if*\x \noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\glueexpr##1\relax\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.estore as glue/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.estore as glue
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as dimen){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as dimen/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as dimen/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{\dimexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.expanded={%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof@unexpanded{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}%
+ \x
+ \if*\x \noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\dimexpr\noexpand\unexpanded{##1}\relax\fi}}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as dimen/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.store as dimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as dimen){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as dimen/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as dimen/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysedef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{%
+ \noexpand\the\dimexpr##1\relax}}%
+ \pgfkeyslet\pgfkeyscurrentpath\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=#1\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysvalueof{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}\x
+ \if*\x \noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else \dimexpr##1\relax\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.estore as dimen/.default=+-*,%
+}% /.estore as dimen
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as glue in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as glue in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as glue in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csdef{#1}{\glueexpr##1\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@skip
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \letcs\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ #1\noexpand\else z@skip\noexpand\fi}%
+ \edef\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath={%
+ \noexpand\expandonce\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp
+ \x
+ \if*\x\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\glueexpr\noexpand\unexpanded{##1}\relax\fi}}%
+ }\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as glue in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store as glue in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as glue in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as glue in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as glue in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csedef{#1}{\the\glueexpr##1\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@skip
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \noexpand\csname\noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ #1\noexpand\else z@skip\noexpand\fi\endcsname
+ \x
+ \if*\x\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\glueexpr##1\relax\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.etore as glue in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.estore as glue in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store in skip cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store in skip cs/}
+%
+% This is a variant of \handler/.store as glue in cs/ when the control sequence in a \cs{skip} (\ie a length).
+% The skip is given by its name, not as a control sequence.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store in skip cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csname#1\endcsname\glueexpr##1\relax\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{/\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@skip
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \csname#1\endcsname % should have been defined as a skip (not expandable)
+ \x
+ \if*\x\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\glueexpr##1\relax\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@skip\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store in skip cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store in skip cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store as dimen in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store as dimen in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store as dimen in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csdef{#1}{\dimexpr##1\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \letcs\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \ifcsname#1\endcsname#1\else z@\fi}%
+ \edef\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath={%
+ \noexpand\expandonce\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp
+ \x
+ \if*\x\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\dimexpr\noexpand\unexpanded{##1}\fi}}%
+ }\noexpand\pgfkeys@temp}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store as dimen in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store as dimen in cs {csname}{+-}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.estore as dimen in cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.estore as dimen in cs/\csuse{=cs-name}}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.estore as dimen in cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else \@defaultunits\itf@sk ##1pt\relax\@nnil
+ \csedef{#1}{\the\dimexpr\itf@sk\relax}\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \noexpand\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ \noexpand\@defaultunits\itf@sk
+ \noexpand\csname#1\endcsname pt\relax\noexpand\@nnil
+ \noexpand\else\itf@sk\z@\noexpand\fi
+ \if*\x
+ \itf@sk\dimexpr\itf@sk*\noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!\relax
+ \else
+ \noexpand\@defaultunits\@tempdima ##1pt\relax\noexpand\@nnil
+ \advance\itf@sk\x\@tempdima
+ \fi
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=\itf@sk}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.etore as dimen in cs/.value required,%
+}% /.estore as dimen in cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.store in dimen cs){Handlers definition: \handler/.store in dimen cs/}
+%
+% This is a variant of \handler/.store as dimen in cs/ when the control sequence in a \cs{dimen}.
+% The dimen is given by its name, not as a control sequence.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.store in dimen cs/.code={%
+ \pgfkeysdef\pgfkeyscurrentpath{%
+ \ifx\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\pgfkeysnovalue@text
+ \else\csname#1\endcsname\dimexpr##1\relax\fi}%
+ \pgfkeyslet{/\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\z@
+ \@tfor\x:=+-*\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x}{%
+ \if*\x \else
+ \noexpand\@defaultunits\itf@sk ##1pt\relax\noexpand\@nnil
+ \fi
+ \noexpand\pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath=%
+ \csname#1\endcsname % should have been defined as a dimen (not expandable)
+ \x
+ \if*\x \noexpand\itf@units@scale##1!
+ \else\itf@sk\fi}}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@def}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ \pgfkeysEsetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath\x/.@blank}{\if*\x\@ne\else\z@\fi}%
+ }},%
+ /handlers/.store in dimen cs/.value required,%
+}% /.store in dimen cs
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.is multiple choice){Handlers definition: \handler/.is multiple choice/}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.is multiple choice/.code=%
+ \pgfkeys{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.cd,%
+ .unknown/.style={/errors/unknown choice value=\pgfkeyscurrentkey\pgfkeyscurrentvalue},%
+ .code=\expandafter\pgfkeys\expandafter{\pgfkeyscurrentkey/.cd,####1}%
+ },%
+ /handlers/.is multiple choice/.value forbidden,%
+}% /.is multiple choice
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \paragraph(/.is enum){Handlers definition: \handler/.is enum/}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\pgfkeys{%
+ /handlers/.is enum/.code={%
+ \itf@cnt\z@
+ \@for\x:=\pgfkeyscurrentvalue\do{%
+ \pgfkeysedef{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/\x}{%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath}{\x}%
+ \noexpand\pgfkeyssetvalue{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.number}{\the\itf@cnt}}%
+ \ifnum\itf@cnt=\z@
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@def}\x
+ \pgfkeyslet{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.@blank}\x
+ \fi
+ \advance\itf@cnt\@ne
+ }%
+ \pgfkeysalso{\pgfkeyscurrentpath/.is choice}},%
+ /handlers/.is enum/.value required,%
+}% /.is enum
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</pgfkeys>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Subsection[etoolbox]
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*etoolbox>
+\ProvidesPackage{interfaces-etoolbox}
+ [2010/06/10 some more etoolbox-like commands (FC)]
+\RequirePackage{interfaces-base}
+\begingroup\catcode`\&=3
+ \long\gdef\etb@doitem#1&{\do{#1}}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\preappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\epreappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\gpreappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\xpreappto}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providerobustcmd\preappto[3]{%
+ \edef#1{\unexpanded{#2}\ifdefined#1\expandonce#1\fi\unexpanded{#3}}%
+}% \preappto
+\providerobustcmd\epreappto[3]{%
+ \edef#1{#2\ifdefined#1\expandonce#1\fi#3}%
+}% \epreappto
+\providerobustcmd*\gpreappto{\global\preappto}
+\providerobustcmd*\xpreappto{\global\epreappto}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\cspreappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\csepreappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\csgpreappto}
+% \begin{macro}{\csxpreappto}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providerobustcmd*\cspreappto[1]{%
+ \csname itf@\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ preappto\else defpreapp\fi\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname#1\endcsname
+}% \cspreappto
+\long\def\itf@preappto#1#2#3{\edef#1{#2\expandonce#1#3}}
+\long\def\itf@defpreapp#1#2#3{\edef#1{#2#3}}
+\providerobustcmd*\csepreappto[1]{%
+ \csname itf@\ifcsname#1\endcsname
+ preappto\else defpreapp\fi\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname#1\endcsname
+}% \csepreappto
+\providerobustcmd*\csgpreappto{\global\cspreappto}
+\providerobustcmd*\csxpreappto{\global\csepreappto}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \begin{macro}{\removefrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\eremovefrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\gremovefrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\xremovefrom}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providerobustcmd\removefrom[2]{\in@false
+ \long\def\itf@tp##1\itf@tp{%
+ \in@true
+ \edef#1{\unexpanded{##1}}%
+ }\expandafter\itf@removefrom\expandafter{#1}{#2}%
+}% \removefrom
+\providerobustcmd\eremovefrom[2]{\begingroup
+ \edef\x{\endgroup\removefrom\noexpand#1{#2}%
+ }\x
+}% \eremovefrom
+\providerobustcmd\gremovefrom[2]{%
+ \removefrom{#1}{#2}%
+ \global\let#1=#1%
+}% \gremovefrom
+\providerobustcmd\xremovefrom[2]{%
+ \eremovefrom{#1}{#2}%
+ \global\let#1=#1%
+}% \xremovefrom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@removefrom}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\itf@removefrom#1#2{% removes #2 (code) from #1 (hook)
+ \def\in@@##1#2##2\in@@{\itf@tp##1##2\in@@@}%
+ \def\in@@@##1\in@@@##2\in@@@{%
+ \ifx\in@##2\else##1\fi
+ }\expandafter\in@@@\in@@#1\itf@tp\in@@@#2\in@\in@@
+}% \itf@removefrom
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\removefromstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\eremovefromstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\gremovefromstart}
+% \begin{macro}{\xremovefromstart}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newrobustcmd*\removefromstart[2]{\in@false
+ \def\itf@tp##1\itf@tp{%
+ \in@true
+ \edef#1{\unexpanded{##1}}%
+ }\expandafter\itf@removefromstart\expandafter{#1}{#2}%
+}% \removefromstart
+\providerobustcmd*\eremovefromstart[2]{\begingroup
+ \edef\x{\endgroup\removefromstart\noexpand#1{#2}%
+ }\x
+}% \eremovefromstart
+\providerobustcmd*\gremovefromstart[2]{%
+ \removefromstart{#1}{#2}%
+ \global\let#1=#1%
+}% \gremovefromstart
+\providerobustcmd*\xremovefromstart[2]{%
+ \eremovefromstart{#1}{#2}%
+ \global\let#1=#1%
+}% \xremovefromstart
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\itf@removefromstart}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\itf@removefromstart#1#2{% removes #2 (code) from #1 (hook)
+ \def\in@@##1#2##2\in@@{##1\in@\itf@tp##2\in@@@}%
+ \def\in@@@##1\in@@@##2\in@@@{%
+ \ifx\in@##1\fi
+ }\expandafter\in@@@\in@@#1\itf@tp\in@@@#2\in@@
+}% \itf@remove@fromstart
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</etoolbox>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{History}
+%
+% \begin{Version}{2010/10/20 v1.0}
+% \item First version.
+% \end{Version}
+%
+%
+% \begin{Version}{2010/10/20 v1.0}
+% \item First version.
+% \end{Version}
+%
+% \end{History}
+%
+% \begin{thebibliography}{9}
+%
+% \bibitem{docstrip}
+% \textit{The \xpackage{docstrip} program};
+% 2009/09/25 v2.5d;
+% \CTAN{macros/latex/base/}.
+%
+% \bibitem{many others...}
+% \textit{some packages...}
+% \end{thebibliography}
+%
+% \begin{appendices}[intoc=true,title=Appendix: README (for CTAN),intoc/title=\textsc{readme},section]
+% The \thispackage package provides a small number of macros to modify the settings of a
+% large number of parameters provided by Most Frequently Used Package (MFUP) for typesetting
+% beautiful document with \LaTeX{}.
+%
+% \thispackage is organised as different modules which are loaded after the master package is loaded.
+% Each module can be loaded separately.
+%
+% \cs{sectionformat}: interface for package \xpackage{titlesec} to modifies the titles
+% produced by the sectionning commands (and their bookmarks).
+%
+% \cs{pagesetup}: interface for package \xpackage{fancyhdr} to modify the current page style
+% or create new page styles.
+%
+% \cs{tocsetup}: interface for package \xpackage{tocloft} to fine tune the aspect of the table of contents,
+% list of figures / of tables. \cs{tocsetup} also applies to \cs{shorttableofcontents} provided
+% by the \xpackage{shorttoc} package.
+%
+% \cs{repeatcell}: to create `dynamic' tabulars, possibly with formula computation (\cs{numexpr},
+% \cs{pgfmathparse} or \cs{FPeval} formulas can be plugged in the tabular or array).
+%
+% \cs{rowfont}: to modify the font and/or the alignment of each cell in a tabular/array row.
+%
+% + some macros to make easier the use of \eTeX{} \cs{marks} registers (useful with \cs{sectionformat}
+% and \cs{pagesetup}).
+%
+% \thispackage is mainly based on scrlfile.sty (provided in the Koma-Script bundle, but
+% Koma-Script classes are not required), on pgfkeys and etoolbox.
+%
+% \thispackage defines some pgfkeys handlers designed specially to make key-value interface
+% for other packages. Using those handlers allows to make an interface in a few minutes...
+%
+%
+% \end{appendices}
+%
+% \clearpage\restoregeometry
+% \pagesetup*{
+% head/right=\leftmark,
+% head/right/font=\normalsize\bfseries\sffamily\pkgcolor
+% }
+%
+% \PrintIndex
+%
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b6465c1eb4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/interfaces/interfaces.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,150 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `interfaces.ins',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% interfaces.dtx (with options: `install')
+%%
+%% This is a generated file.
+%%
+%% interfaces : 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces : interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+%%
+%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+%% version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+%% version. The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%%
+%% This work consists of the main source file interfaces.dtx
+%% and the derived files
+%% interfaces.sty, interfaces.pdf, interfaces.ins,
+%% interfaces-base.sty,
+%% interfaces-LaTeX.sty,
+%% interfaces-tikz.sty,
+%% interfaces-titlesec.sty,
+%% interfaces-hyperref.sty,
+%% interfaces-bookmark.sty,
+%% interfaces-hypbmsec.sty,interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex,
+%% interfaces-fancyhdr.sty,
+%% interfaces-marks.sty,
+%% interfaces-tocloft.sty,
+%% interfaces-makecell.sty,
+%% interfaces-enumitem.sty,
+%% interfaces-truncate.sty,
+%% interfaces-appendix.sty,
+%% interfaces-embedfile.sty,
+%% interfaces-environ.sty,
+%% interfaces-umrand.sty,
+%% interfaces-scrlfile.sty,
+%% interfaces-pgfkeys.sty,
+%% interfaces-etoolbox.sty,
+%% interfaces-fancyvrb.sty
+%%
+%% interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+%% Copyright (C) 2010 by Florent Chervet <florent.chervet@free.fr>
+%%
+\input docstrip.tex
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{* Installation}
+\Msg{* Package: 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+
+\keepsilent
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
+\let\MetaPrefix\relax
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+interfaces : 2010/10/20 v1.0 - interfaces : interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+
+This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either
+version 1.3 of this license or (at your option) any later
+version. The latest version of this license is in
+ http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+
+This work consists of the main source file interfaces.dtx
+and the derived files
+ interfaces.sty, interfaces.pdf, interfaces.ins,
+ interfaces-base.sty,
+ interfaces-LaTeX.sty,
+ interfaces-tikz.sty,
+ interfaces-titlesec.sty,
+ interfaces-hyperref.sty,
+ interfaces-bookmark.sty,
+ interfaces-hypbmsec.sty,interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex,
+ interfaces-fancyhdr.sty,
+ interfaces-marks.sty,
+ interfaces-tocloft.sty,
+ interfaces-makecell.sty,
+ interfaces-enumitem.sty,
+ interfaces-truncate.sty,
+ interfaces-appendix.sty,
+ interfaces-embedfile.sty,
+ interfaces-environ.sty,
+ interfaces-umrand.sty,
+ interfaces-scrlfile.sty,
+ interfaces-pgfkeys.sty,
+ interfaces-etoolbox.sty,
+ interfaces-fancyvrb.sty
+
+interfaces: interfaces with keys for other packages (FC)
+Copyright (C) 2010 by Florent Chervet <florent.chervet@free.fr>
+
+\endpreamble
+\let\MetaPrefix\DoubleperCent
+
+\generate{%
+ \file{interfaces.ins}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{install}}%
+ \file{interfaces.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{package}}%
+ \file{interfaces-base.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{base}}%
+ \file{interfaces-pgfkeys.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{pgfkeys}}%
+ \file{interfaces-etoolbox.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{etoolbox}}%
+ \file{interfaces-scrlfile.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{scrlfile}}%
+ \file{interfaces-LaTeX.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{LaTeX}}%
+ \file{interfaces-titlesec.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{titlesec}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hyperref.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hyperref}}%
+ \file{interfaces-bookmark.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{bookmark}}%
+ \file{interfaces-fancyhdr.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{fancyhdr}}%
+ \file{interfaces-marks.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{marks}}%
+ \file{interfaces-tocloft.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{tocloft}}%
+ \file{interfaces-makecell.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{makecell}}%
+ \file{interfaces-enumitem.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{enumitem}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hypbmsec.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hypbmsec}}%
+ \file{interfaces-hypbmsec.code.tex}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{hypbmsec.code.tex}}%
+ \file{interfaces-truncate.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{truncate}}%
+ \file{interfaces-tikz.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{tikz}}%
+ \file{interfaces-umrand.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{umrand}}%
+ \file{interfaces-environ.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{environ}}%
+ \file{interfaces-appendix.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{appendix}}%
+ \file{interfaces-embedfile.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{embedfile}}%
+ \file{interfaces-fancyvrb.sty}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{fancyvrb}}%
+}
+
+\askforoverwritetrue
+\generate{%
+ \file{interfaces.drv}{\from{interfaces.dtx}{driver}}%
+}
+
+\obeyspaces
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
+\Msg{* file into a directory searched by TeX:}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* interfaces.sty}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the file `interfaces.dtx'}
+\Msg{* through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing!}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{************************************************************************}
+
+\endbatchfile
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `interfaces.ins'.
generated by cgit v1.2.3 (git 2.39.1) at 2024-12-30 21:29:42 +0000